diff options
Diffstat (limited to 'share/doc/kicad/help/it/pcbnew.html')
| -rw-r--r-- | share/doc/kicad/help/it/pcbnew.html | 7606 |
1 files changed, 7606 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/share/doc/kicad/help/it/pcbnew.html b/share/doc/kicad/help/it/pcbnew.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f60afad --- /dev/null +++ b/share/doc/kicad/help/it/pcbnew.html @@ -0,0 +1,7606 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html> +<html lang="it"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-8"> +<meta name="generator" content="AsciiDoc 8.6.8"> +<title>Pcbnew</title> +<style type="text/css"> +/* Shared CSS for AsciiDoc xhtml11 and html5 backends */ + +/* Default font. */ +body { + font-family: Georgia,serif; +} + +/* Title font. */ +h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, +div.title, caption.title, +thead, p.table.header, +#toctitle, +#author, #revnumber, #revdate, #revremark, +#footer { + font-family: Arial,Helvetica,sans-serif; +} + +body { + margin: 1em 5% 1em 5%; +} + +a { + color: blue; + text-decoration: underline; +} +a:visited { + color: fuchsia; +} + +em { + font-style: italic; + color: navy; +} + +strong { + font-weight: bold; + color: #083194; +} + +h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6 { + color: #527bbd; + margin-top: 1.2em; + margin-bottom: 0.5em; + line-height: 1.3; +} + +h1, h2, h3 { + border-bottom: 2px solid silver; +} +h2 { + padding-top: 0.5em; +} +h3 { + float: left; +} +h3 + * { + clear: left; +} +h5 { + font-size: 1.0em; +} + +div.sectionbody { + margin-left: 0; +} + +hr { + border: 1px solid silver; +} + +p { + margin-top: 0.5em; + margin-bottom: 0.5em; +} + +ul, ol, li > p { + margin-top: 0; +} +ul > li { color: #aaa; } +ul > li > * { color: black; } + +pre { + padding: 0; + margin: 0; +} + +#author { + color: #527bbd; + font-weight: bold; + font-size: 1.1em; +} +#email { +} +#revnumber, #revdate, #revremark { +} + +#footer { + font-size: small; + border-top: 2px solid silver; + padding-top: 0.5em; + margin-top: 4.0em; +} +#footer-text { + float: left; + padding-bottom: 0.5em; +} +#footer-badges { + float: right; + padding-bottom: 0.5em; +} + +#preamble { + margin-top: 1.5em; + margin-bottom: 1.5em; +} +div.imageblock, div.exampleblock, div.verseblock, +div.quoteblock, div.literalblock, div.listingblock, div.sidebarblock, +div.admonitionblock { + margin-top: 1.0em; + margin-bottom: 1.5em; +} +div.admonitionblock { + margin-top: 2.0em; + margin-bottom: 2.0em; + margin-right: 10%; + color: #606060; +} + +div.content { /* Block element content. */ + padding: 0; +} + +/* Block element titles. */ +div.title, caption.title { + color: #527bbd; + font-weight: bold; + text-align: left; + margin-top: 1.0em; + margin-bottom: 0.5em; +} +div.title + * { + margin-top: 0; +} + +td div.title:first-child { + margin-top: 0.0em; +} +div.content div.title:first-child { + margin-top: 0.0em; +} +div.content + div.title { + margin-top: 0.0em; +} + +div.sidebarblock > div.content { + background: #ffffee; + border: 1px solid #dddddd; + border-left: 4px solid #f0f0f0; + padding: 0.5em; +} + +div.listingblock > div.content { + border: 1px solid #dddddd; + border-left: 5px solid #f0f0f0; + background: #f8f8f8; + padding: 0.5em; +} + +div.quoteblock, div.verseblock { + padding-left: 1.0em; + margin-left: 1.0em; + margin-right: 10%; + border-left: 5px solid #f0f0f0; + color: #777777; +} + +div.quoteblock > div.attribution { + padding-top: 0.5em; + text-align: right; +} + +div.verseblock > pre.content { + font-family: inherit; + font-size: inherit; +} +div.verseblock > div.attribution { + padding-top: 0.75em; + text-align: left; +} +/* DEPRECATED: Pre version 8.2.7 verse style literal block. */ +div.verseblock + div.attribution { + text-align: left; +} + +div.admonitionblock .icon { + vertical-align: top; + font-size: 1.1em; + font-weight: bold; + text-decoration: underline; + color: #527bbd; + padding-right: 0.5em; +} +div.admonitionblock td.content { + padding-left: 0.5em; + border-left: 3px solid #dddddd; +} + +div.exampleblock > div.content { + border-left: 3px solid #dddddd; + padding-left: 0.5em; +} + +div.imageblock div.content { padding-left: 0; } +span.image img { border-style: none; } +a.image:visited { color: white; } + +dl { + margin-top: 0.8em; + margin-bottom: 0.8em; +} +dt { + margin-top: 0.5em; + margin-bottom: 0; + font-style: normal; + color: navy; +} +dd > *:first-child { + margin-top: 0.1em; +} + +ul, ol { + list-style-position: outside; +} +ol.arabic { + list-style-type: decimal; +} +ol.loweralpha { + list-style-type: lower-alpha; +} +ol.upperalpha { + list-style-type: upper-alpha; +} +ol.lowerroman { + list-style-type: lower-roman; +} +ol.upperroman { + list-style-type: upper-roman; +} + +div.compact ul, div.compact ol, +div.compact p, div.compact p, +div.compact div, div.compact div { + margin-top: 0.1em; + margin-bottom: 0.1em; +} + +tfoot { + font-weight: bold; +} +td > div.verse { + white-space: pre; +} + +div.hdlist { + margin-top: 0.8em; + margin-bottom: 0.8em; +} +div.hdlist tr { + padding-bottom: 15px; +} +dt.hdlist1.strong, td.hdlist1.strong { + font-weight: bold; +} +td.hdlist1 { + vertical-align: top; + font-style: normal; + padding-right: 0.8em; + color: navy; +} +td.hdlist2 { + vertical-align: top; +} +div.hdlist.compact tr { + margin: 0; + padding-bottom: 0; +} + +.comment { + background: yellow; +} + +.footnote, .footnoteref { + font-size: 0.8em; +} + +span.footnote, span.footnoteref { + vertical-align: super; +} + +#footnotes { + margin: 20px 0 20px 0; + padding: 7px 0 0 0; +} + +#footnotes div.footnote { + margin: 0 0 5px 0; +} + +#footnotes hr { + border: none; + border-top: 1px solid silver; + height: 1px; + text-align: left; + margin-left: 0; + width: 20%; + min-width: 100px; +} + +div.colist td { + padding-right: 0.5em; + padding-bottom: 0.3em; + vertical-align: top; +} +div.colist td img { + margin-top: 0.3em; +} + +@media print { + #footer-badges { display: none; } +} + +#toc { + margin-bottom: 2.5em; +} + +#toctitle { + color: #527bbd; + font-size: 1.1em; + font-weight: bold; + margin-top: 1.0em; + margin-bottom: 0.1em; +} + +div.toclevel1, div.toclevel2, div.toclevel3, div.toclevel4 { + margin-top: 0; + margin-bottom: 0; +} +div.toclevel2 { + margin-left: 2em; + font-size: 0.9em; +} +div.toclevel3 { + margin-left: 4em; + font-size: 0.9em; +} +div.toclevel4 { + margin-left: 6em; + font-size: 0.9em; +} + +span.aqua { color: aqua; } +span.black { color: black; } +span.blue { color: blue; } +span.fuchsia { color: fuchsia; } +span.gray { color: gray; } +span.green { color: green; } +span.lime { color: lime; } +span.maroon { color: maroon; } +span.navy { color: navy; } +span.olive { color: olive; } +span.purple { color: purple; } +span.red { color: red; } +span.silver { color: silver; } +span.teal { color: teal; } +span.white { color: white; } +span.yellow { color: yellow; } + +span.aqua-background { background: aqua; } +span.black-background { background: black; } +span.blue-background { background: blue; } +span.fuchsia-background { background: fuchsia; } +span.gray-background { background: gray; } +span.green-background { background: green; } +span.lime-background { background: lime; } +span.maroon-background { background: maroon; } +span.navy-background { background: navy; } +span.olive-background { background: olive; } +span.purple-background { background: purple; } +span.red-background { background: red; } +span.silver-background { background: silver; } +span.teal-background { background: teal; } +span.white-background { background: white; } +span.yellow-background { background: yellow; } + +span.big { font-size: 2em; } +span.small { font-size: 0.6em; } + +span.underline { text-decoration: underline; } +span.overline { text-decoration: overline; } +span.line-through { text-decoration: line-through; } + + +/* + * xhtml11 specific + * + * */ + +tt { + font-family: monospace; + font-size: inherit; + color: navy; +} + +div.tableblock { + margin-top: 1.0em; + margin-bottom: 1.5em; +} +div.tableblock > table { + border: 3px solid #527bbd; +} +thead, p.table.header { + font-weight: bold; + color: #527bbd; +} +p.table { + margin-top: 0; +} +/* Because the table frame attribute is overriden by CSS in most browsers. */ +div.tableblock > table[frame="void"] { + border-style: none; +} +div.tableblock > table[frame="hsides"] { + border-left-style: none; + border-right-style: none; +} +div.tableblock > table[frame="vsides"] { + border-top-style: none; + border-bottom-style: none; +} + + +/* + * html5 specific + * + * */ + +.monospaced { + font-family: monospace; + font-size: inherit; + color: navy; +} + +table.tableblock { + margin-top: 1.0em; + margin-bottom: 1.5em; +} +thead, p.tableblock.header { + font-weight: bold; + color: #527bbd; +} +p.tableblock { + margin-top: 0; +} +table.tableblock { + border-width: 3px; + border-spacing: 0px; + border-style: solid; + border-color: #527bbd; + border-collapse: collapse; +} +th.tableblock, td.tableblock { + border-width: 1px; + padding: 4px; + border-style: solid; + border-color: #527bbd; +} + +table.tableblock.frame-topbot { + border-left-style: hidden; + border-right-style: hidden; +} +table.tableblock.frame-sides { + border-top-style: hidden; + border-bottom-style: hidden; +} +table.tableblock.frame-none { + border-style: hidden; +} + +th.tableblock.halign-left, td.tableblock.halign-left { + text-align: left; +} +th.tableblock.halign-center, td.tableblock.halign-center { + text-align: center; +} +th.tableblock.halign-right, td.tableblock.halign-right { + text-align: right; +} + +th.tableblock.valign-top, td.tableblock.valign-top { + vertical-align: top; +} +th.tableblock.valign-middle, td.tableblock.valign-middle { + vertical-align: middle; +} +th.tableblock.valign-bottom, td.tableblock.valign-bottom { + vertical-align: bottom; +} + + +/* + * manpage specific + * + * */ + +body.manpage h1 { + padding-top: 0.5em; + padding-bottom: 0.5em; + border-top: 2px solid silver; + border-bottom: 2px solid silver; +} +body.manpage h2 { + border-style: none; +} +body.manpage div.sectionbody { + margin-left: 3em; +} + +@media print { + body.manpage div#toc { display: none; } +} + + +/* + * Theme specific overrides of the preceding (asciidoc.css) CSS. + * + */ +body { + font-family: Garamond, Georgia, serif; + font-size: 17px; + color: #3E4349; + line-height: 1.3em; +} +h1, h2, h3, h4, h5, h6, +div.title, caption.title, +thead, p.table.header, +#toctitle, +#author, #revnumber, #revdate, #revremark, +#footer { + font-family: Garmond, Georgia, serif; + font-weight: normal; + border-bottom-width: 0; + color: #3E4349; +} +div.title, caption.title { color: #596673; font-weight: bold; } +h1 { font-size: 240%; } +h2 { font-size: 180%; } +h3 { font-size: 150%; } +h4 { font-size: 130%; } +h5 { font-size: 115%; } +h6 { font-size: 100%; } +#header h1 { margin-top: 0; } +#toc { + color: #444444; + line-height: 1.5; + padding-top: 1.5em; +} +#toctitle { + font-size: 20px; +} +#toc a { + border-bottom: 1px dotted #999999; + color: #444444 !important; + text-decoration: none !important; +} +#toc a:hover { + border-bottom: 1px solid #6D4100; + color: #6D4100 !important; + text-decoration: none !important; +} +div.toclevel1 { margin-top: 0.2em; font-size: 16px; } +div.toclevel2 { margin-top: 0.15em; font-size: 14px; } +em, dt, td.hdlist1 { color: black; } +strong { color: #3E4349; } +a { color: #004B6B; text-decoration: none; border-bottom: 1px dotted #004B6B; } +a:visited { color: #615FA0; border-bottom: 1px dotted #615FA0; } +a:hover { color: #6D4100; border-bottom: 1px solid #6D4100; } +div.tableblock > table, table.tableblock { border: 3px solid #E8E8E8; } +th.tableblock, td.tableblock { border: 1px solid #E8E8E8; } +ul > li > * { color: #3E4349; } +pre, tt, .monospaced { font-family: Consolas,Menlo,'Deja Vu Sans Mono','Bitstream Vera Sans Mono',monospace; } +tt, .monospaced { font-size: 0.9em; color: black; +} +div.exampleblock > div.content, div.sidebarblock > div.content, div.listingblock > div.content { border-width: 0 0 0 3px; border-color: #E8E8E8; } +div.verseblock { border-left-width: 0; margin-left: 3em; } +div.quoteblock { border-left-width: 3px; margin-left: 0; margin-right: 0;} +div.admonitionblock td.content { border-left: 3px solid #E8E8E8; } + + +@media screen { + body { + max-width: 50em; /* approximately 80 characters wide */ + margin-left: 16em; + } + + #toc { + position: fixed; + top: 0; + left: 0; + bottom: 0; + width: 13em; + padding: 0.5em; + padding-bottom: 1.5em; + margin: 0; + overflow: auto; + border-right: 3px solid #f8f8f8; + background-color: white; + } + + #toc .toclevel1 { + margin-top: 0.5em; + } + + #toc .toclevel2 { + margin-top: 0.25em; + display: list-item; + color: #aaaaaa; + } + + #toctitle { + margin-top: 0.5em; + } +} +</style> +<script type="text/javascript"> +/*<+'])'); + // Function that scans the DOM tree for header elements (the DOM2 + // nodeIterator API would be a better technique but not supported by all + // browsers). + var iterate = function (el) { + for (var i = el.firstChild; i != null; i = i.nextSibling) { + if (i.nodeType == 1 /* Node.ELEMENT_NODE */) { + var mo = re.exec(i.tagName); + if (mo && (i.getAttribute("class") || i.getAttribute("className")) != "float") { + result[result.length] = new TocEntry(i, getText(i), mo[1]-1); + } + iterate(i); + } + } + } + iterate(el); + return result; + } + + var toc = document.getElementById("toc"); + if (!toc) { + return; + } + + // Delete existing TOC entries in case we're reloading the TOC. + var tocEntriesToRemove = []; + var i; + for (i = 0; i < toc.childNodes.length; i++) { + var entry = toc.childNodes[i]; + if (entry.nodeName.toLowerCase() == 'div' + && entry.getAttribute("class") + && entry.getAttribute("class").match(/^toclevel/)) + tocEntriesToRemove.push(entry); + } + for (i = 0; i < tocEntriesToRemove.length; i++) { + toc.removeChild(tocEntriesToRemove[i]); + } + + // Rebuild TOC entries. + var entries = tocEntries(document.getElementById("content"), toclevels); + for (var i = 0; i < entries.length; ++i) { + var entry = entries[i]; + if (entry.element.id == "") + entry.element.id = "_toc_" + i; + var a = document.createElement("a"); + a.href = "#" + entry.element.id; + a.appendChild(document.createTextNode(entry.text)); + var div = document.createElement("div"); + div.appendChild(a); + div.className = "toclevel" + entry.toclevel; + toc.appendChild(div); + } + if (entries.length == 0) + toc.parentNode.removeChild(toc); +}, + + +///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// Footnotes generator +///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// + +/* Based on footnote generation code from: + * http://www.brandspankingnew.net/archive/2005/07/format_footnote.html + */ + +footnotes: function () { + // Delete existing footnote entries in case we're reloading the footnodes. + var i; + var noteholder = document.getElementById("footnotes"); + if (!noteholder) { + return; + } + var entriesToRemove = []; + for (i = 0; i < noteholder.childNodes.length; i++) { + var entry = noteholder.childNodes[i]; + if (entry.nodeName.toLowerCase() == 'div' && entry.getAttribute("class") == "footnote") + entriesToRemove.push(entry); + } + for (i = 0; i < entriesToRemove.length; i++) { + noteholder.removeChild(entriesToRemove[i]); + } + + // Rebuild footnote entries. + var cont = document.getElementById("content"); + var spans = cont.getElementsByTagName("span"); + var refs = {}; + var n = 0; + for (i=0; i<spans.length; i++) { + if (spans[i].className == "footnote") { + n++; + var note = spans[i].getAttribute("data-note"); + if (!note) { + // Use [\s\S] in place of . so multi-line matches work. + // Because JavaScript has no s (dotall) regex flag. + note = spans[i].innerHTML.match(/\s*\[([\s\S]*)]\s*/)[1]; + spans[i].innerHTML = + "[<a id='_footnoteref_" + n + "' href='#_footnote_" + n + + "' title='View footnote' class='footnote'>" + n + "</a>]"; + spans[i].setAttribute("data-note", note); + } + noteholder.innerHTML += + "<div class='footnote' id='_footnote_" + n + "'>" + + "<a href='#_footnoteref_" + n + "' title='Return to text'>" + + n + "</a>. " + note + "</div>"; + var id =spans[i].getAttribute("id"); + if (id != null) refs["#"+id] = n; + } + } + if (n == 0) + noteholder.parentNode.removeChild(noteholder); + else { + // Process footnoterefs. + for (i=0; i<spans.length; i++) { + if (spans[i].className == "footnoteref") { + var href = spans[i].getElementsByTagName("a")[0].getAttribute("href"); + href = href.match(/#.*/)[0]; // Because IE return full URL. + n = refs[href]; + spans[i].innerHTML = + "[<a href='#_footnote_" + n + + "' title='View footnote' class='footnote'>" + n + "</a>]"; + } + } + } +}, + +install: function(toclevels) { + var timerId; + + function reinstall() { + asciidoc.footnotes(); + if (toclevels) { + asciidoc.toc(toclevels); + } + } + + function reinstallAndRemoveTimer() { + clearInterval(timerId); + reinstall(); + } + + timerId = setInterval(reinstall, 500); + if (document.addEventListener) + document.addEventListener("DOMContentLoaded", reinstallAndRemoveTimer, false); + else + window.onload = reinstallAndRemoveTimer; +} + +} +asciidoc.install(2); +/*]]>*/ +</script> +</head> +<body class="book"> +<div id="header"> +<h1>Pcbnew</h1> +<span id="author">The KiCad Team</span><br> +<div id="toc"> + <div id="toctitle">Sommario</div> + <noscript><p><b>JavaScript must be enabled in your browser to display the table of contents.</b></p></noscript> +</div> +</div> +<div id="content"> +<div id="preamble"> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="paragraph"><p><em>Manuale di riferimento</em></p></div> +<div class="paragraph" id="copyright"><p><strong>Copyright</strong></p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Questo documento è coperto dal Copyright © 2010–2015 dei suoi autori come +elencati in seguito. È possibile distribuirlo e/o modificarlo nei termini +sia della GNU General Public License (<a href="http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html">http://www.gnu.org/licenses/gpl.html</a>), +versione 3 o successive, che della Creative Commons Attribution License +(<a href="http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/">http://creativecommons.org/licenses/by/3.0/</a>), versione 3.0 o successive.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Tutti i marchi registrati all’interno di questa guida appartengono ai loro +legittimi proprietari.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph" id="contributors"><p><strong>Collaboratori</strong></p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Jean-Pierre Charras, Fabrizio Tappero.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph" id="translation"><p><strong>Traduzione</strong></p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Marco Ciampa <<a href="mailto:ciampix@libero.it">ciampix@libero.it</a>>, 2014-2015.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph" id="feedback"><p><strong>Feedback</strong></p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Si prega di inviare qualsiasi rapporto bug, suggerimento o nuova versione a:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Documentazione di KiCad: <a href="https://github.com/KiCad/kicad-doc/issues">https://github.com/KiCad/kicad-doc/issues</a> +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Software KiCad: <a href="https://bugs.launchpad.net/kicad">https://bugs.launchpad.net/kicad</a> +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Traduzione di KiCad: <a href="https://github.com/KiCad/kicad-i18n/issues">https://github.com/KiCad/kicad-i18n/issues</a> +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph" id="publication_date_and_software_version"><p><strong>Data di pubblicazione e versione del software</strong></p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>17 marzo 2014.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_introduzione_a_pcbnew">1. Introduzione a Pcbnew</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_descrizione">1.1. Descrizione</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew è un potente strumento software per lo sviluppo di circuiti stampati +disponibile per i sistemi operativi Linux, Microsoft Windows e Apple OS +X. Pcbnew viene usato assieme al programma di disegno schemi elettrici +Eeschema per la creazione di circuiti stampati.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew gestisce le librerie di impronte. Ogni impronta è un disegno del +componente fisico - la disposizione delle piazzole che forniscono le +connessioni al componente. Le impronte richieste vengono automaticamente +caricate durante la lettura della Netlist. Qualsiasi cambiamento nella +selezione delle impronte o annotazione può essere cambiato nello schema e +aggiornato in pcbnew rigenerando la netlist e ricaricandola nuovamente in +pcbnew.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew fornisce uno strumento per il controllo delle regole elettriche +(Design Rule Check o DRC) che previene i problemi di distanziamento tra +piste e piazzole e previene anche le connessioni errate che non hanno +corrispondenza nella netlist/schema elettrico. Quando si usa lo sbroglio +interattivo, questo esegue in continuazione questo controllo aiutando lo +sbroglio delle singole piste.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew fornisce una visualizzazione a ratnest, una ragnatela delle +connessioni delle piazzole delle impronte connesse sullo schema +elettrico. Queste connessioni si spostano dinamicamente seguendo gli +spostamenti effettuati di tracce e impronte.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew possiede un semplice ma efficace sbrogliatore per assistere nella +produzione del circuito. Una funzione di esportazione/importazione in +formato dsn SPECCTRA permette inoltre l’uso di sbrogliatori più avanzati.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew fornisce opzioni specifiche per la produzione di circuiti ad ultra +alta frequenza (come piazzole trapezoidali e di forme complesse, +disposizione automatica di bobine sul circuito stampato, ecc.).</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_caratteristiche_principali_di_progettazione">1.2. Caratteristiche principali di progettazione</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’unità più piccola in pcbnew è 1 nanometro. Tutte le dimensioni sono +memorizzate come integer di nanometri.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew può generare fino a 32 strati rame, 14 strati tecnici (serigrafia, +maschera di saldatura, adesivo componenti, pasta salda, bordi di taglio) più +4 ausiliari (disegni e commenti) e gestisce in tempo reale l’indicazione +della ragnatela di connessioni (rats nest) delle tracce mancanti.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La visualizzazione degli elementi del circuito stampato (tracce, piazzole, +testo, disegni…) è personalizzabile:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +in modalità piena o solo contorno; +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +con o senza isolamento delle tracce. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per i circuiti complessi, la visualizzazione degli strati, zone, componenti +può essere nascosta in maniera selettiva per una migliore chiarezza sullo +schermo. I collegamenti delle piste possono essere evidenziati per +migliorarne il contrasto.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le impronte possono essere ruotate di qualsiasi angolo, con una risoluzione +di 0.1 grado.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew include un editor di impronte che permette la modifica delle singole +impronte posta su un circuito stampato o la modifica che quelle presenti in +una libreria.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’editor impronte è fornito di molti strumenti che fanno risparmiare tempo +come:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Numerazione piazzole veloce, semplicemente trascinando il mouse sopra le + piazzole che si vuole numerare. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Semplice generazione multipla di piazzole circolari o rettangolari per + LGA/BGA o impronte circolari. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Allineamento semi-automatico di righe o colonne di piazzole. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le piazzole delle impronte hanno una serie di proprietà che possono essere +regolate. Le piazzole possono essere tonde, rettangolari, ovali o +trapezoidali. Le forature dei componenti passanti possono essere spostate +nella piazzola e possono essere tonde o a fessura. Le singole piazzole +possono anche essere ruotate ed avere particolari spaziature per le maschere +di saldatura, per l’isolamento dei collegamenti o per la pasta salda. Le +piazzole possono anche avere una connessione piena o una connessione a basso +trasferimento termico per migliorare la manifattura del circuito +stampato. Qualsiasi combinazione anche univoca di piazzole può essere +inserita in un’impronta.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew genera facilmente tutti i documenti necessari per la produzione:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Prodotti per la fabbricazione: +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +File per fotoplotter in formato GERBER RS274X. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +File per la foratura in formato EXCELLON. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Stampa di file in formato HPGL, SVG o DXF. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Mappe di disegno e forature in formato Postscript. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Stampe locali. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_osservazioni_generali">1.3. Osservazioni generali</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A causa del livello di controllo necessario, è fortemente raccomandato l’uso +di mouse a tre tasti con pcbnew. Funzioni primarie come il pan e lo zoom +necessitano di un mouse a tre tasti.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Nella nuova versione di KiCad, in pcbnew sono stati introdotti cambiamenti +radicali da parte di sviluppatori del CERN. Questi includono caratteristiche +come un nuovo motore di render (modalità di visualizzazione OpenGL e Cairo), +uno sbrogliatore interattivo "push and shove", sbroglio e accordamento di +piste differenziali e a zig-zag, un editor di impronte revisionato, e molte +altre ancora. Si noti che molte di queste caratteristiche esistono <strong>solo</strong> +nelle nuove modalità di visualizzazione OpenGL e Cairo.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_installazione">2. Installazione</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_installazione_del_software">2.1. Installazione del software</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La procedura di installazione è descritta nella documentazione di KiCad.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_modifica_della_configurazione_predefinita">2.2. Modifica della configurazione predefinita</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A default configuration file <span class="monospaced">kicad.pro</span> is provided in +<span class="monospaced">kicad/share/template</span>. This file is used as the initial configuration for +all new projects.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This configuration file can be modified to change the libraries to be +loaded.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>To do this:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Launch Pcbnew using kicad or directly. On Windows it is in + <span class="monospaced">C:\kicad\bin\pcbnew.exe</span> and on Linux you can run + <span class="monospaced">/usr/local/kicad/bin/kicad</span> or <span class="monospaced">/usr/local/kicad/bin/pcbnew</span> if the + binaries are located in <span class="monospaced">/usr/local/kicad/bin</span>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Select Preferences - Libs and Dir. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Edit as required. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Save the modified configuration (Save Cfg) to + <span class="monospaced">kicad/share/template/kicad.pro</span>. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_managing_footprint_libraries_legacy_versions">2.3. Managing Footprint Libraries: legacy versions</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>You can have access to the library list initialization from the Preferences +menu:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Library_list_menu_item.png" alt="images/Library_list_menu_item.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The image below shows the dialog which allows you to set the footprint +library list:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Footprint_library_list.png" alt="images/Footprint_library_list.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>You can use this to add all the libraries that contain the footprints +required for your project. You should also remove unused libraries from new +projects to prevent footprint name clashes. Please note, there is an issue +with the footprint library list when duplicate footprint names exist in more +than one library. When this occurs, the footprint will be loaded from the +first library found in the list. If this is an issue (you cannot load the +footprint you want), either change the library list order using the "Up" and +"Down" buttons in the dialog above or give the footprint a unique name using +the footprint editor.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_managing_footprint_libraries_pretty_repositories">2.4. Managing Footprint Libraries: .pretty repositories</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A partire dalla release 4.0, Pcbnew utilizza la nuova implementazione a +tabella per la gestione delle librerie di impronte. Le informazioni nella +sezione precedente non solo più valide. Il gestore della tabella delle +librerie è accessibile da:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Library_tables_menu_item.png" alt="images/Library_tables_menu_item.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’immagine sottostante mostra la finestra di dialogo di modifica della +tabella delle librerie di impronte che può essere aperta invocando la voce +"Manager librerie di impronte" dal menu delle "Preferenze".</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Footprint_tables_list.png" alt="images/Footprint_tables_list.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La tabella librerie di impronte viene usata per mappare una libreria di +impronte di qualsiasi tipo supportato ad una denominazione di +libreria. Questa denominazione viene usata per cercare le impronte in +alternativa al precedente metodo che dipendeva dall’ordine di ricerca dei +percorsi. Ciò permette a Pcbnew di accedere alle impronte con lo stesso nome +in diverse librerie assicurando che venga caricata la corretta impronta +dalla libreria appropriata. Inoltre ciò permette di supportare il +caricamento di librerie provenienti da editor di circuiti stampati +alternativi come Eagle e gEDA.</p></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_tabella_librerie_impronte_globale">2.4.1. Tabella librerie impronte globale</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La tabella librerie impronte globale contiene l’elenco delle librerie che +sono sempre disponibili indipendentemente dal file progetto attualmente +caricato. La tabella viene salvata nel file <span class="monospaced">fp-lib-table</span> nella cartella +utente. La posizione di questa cartella dipende dal sistema operativo.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_tabella_librerie_di_impronte_specifica_del_progetto">2.4.2. Tabella librerie di impronte specifica del progetto</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La tabella delle librerie di impronte specifica del progetto contiene +l’elenco delle librerie che sono disponibili specificatamente per il file di +progetto attualmente caricato. Questa tabella può essere modificata solo +quando viene caricata assieme al file di progetto della scheda. Se non +viene caricato un file di progetto o non c'è il file della tabella delle +librerie di impronte nel percorso del progetto, viene creata una tabella +vuota che può essere modificata ed in seguito salvata assieme al file della +scheda.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_configurazione_iniziale">2.4.3. Configurazione iniziale</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La prima volta che CvPcb o Pcbnew vengono eseguiti e il file della tabella +globale delle impronte <span class="monospaced">fp-lib-table</span> non viene trovato nella cartella home +dell’utente, Pcbnew cercherà di copiare il file della tabella delle impronte +predefinito <span class="monospaced">fp_global_table</span> memorizzato nella cartella di sistema dei +modelli di KiCad sul file <span class="monospaced">fp-lib-table</span> nella cartella home dell’utente. Se +<span class="monospaced">fp_global_table</span> non si trova, verrà creato un file di tabella librerie di +impronte vuoto nella cartella home dell’utente. Se si verifica quest’ultima +azione, l’utente può sia copiare il file <span class="monospaced">fp_global_table</span> manualmente o +configurare la tabella a mano. La tabella librerie di impronte predefinita +include tutte le librerie di impronte standard che vengono installate come +parte di KiCad.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_aggiunta_voci_di_tabella">2.4.4. Aggiunta voci di tabella</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In order to use a footprint library, it must first be added to either the +global table or the project specific table. The project specific table is +only applicable when a board file is open. Each library entry must have a +unique nickname. This does not have to be related in any way to the actual +library file name or path. The colon <span class="monospaced">:</span> character cannot be used anywhere +in the nickname. Each library entry must have a valid path and/or file name +depending on the type of library. Paths can be defined as absolute, +relative, or by environment variable substitution. The appropriate plug in +type must be selected in order for the library to be properly read. Pcbnew +currently supports reading KiCad legacy, KiCad Pretty, Eagle, and gEDA +footprint libraries. There is also a description field to add a description +of the library entry. The option field is not used at this time so adding +options will have no effect when loading libraries. Please note that you +cannot have duplicate library nicknames in the same table. However, you can +have duplicate library nicknames in both the global and project specific +footprint library table. The project specific table entry will take +precedence over the global table entry when duplicated names occur. When +entries are defined in the project specific table, an fp-lib-table file +containing the entries will be written into the folder of the currently open +netlist.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_environment_variable_substitution">2.4.5. Environment Variable Substitution</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>One of the most powerful features of the footprint library table is +environment variable substitution. This allows you to define custom paths +to where your libraries are stored in environment variables. Environment +variable substitution is supported by using the syntax <span class="monospaced">${ENV_VAR_NAME}</span> in +the footprint library path. By default, at run time Pcbnew defines the +<span class="monospaced">$KISYSMOD</span> environment variable. This points to where the default +footprint libraries that were installed with KiCad are located. You can +override <span class="monospaced">$KISYSMOD</span> by defining it yourself which allows you to substitute +your own libraries in place of the default KiCad footprint libraries. When +a board file is loaded, Pcbnew also defines the <span class="monospaced">$KPRJMOD</span> using the board +file path. This allows you to create libraries in the project path without +having to define the absolute path to the library in the project specific +footprint library table.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_using_the_github_plugin">2.4.6. Using the GitHub Plugin</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The GitHub plugin is a special plugin that provides an interface for +read-only access to a remote GitHub repository consisting of pretty (Pretty +is name of the KiCad footprint file format) footprints and optionally +provides "Copy-On-Write" (COW) support for editing footprints read from the +GitHub repo and saving them locally. Therefore the "GitHub" plugin is for +<strong>read-only for accessing remote pretty footprint libraries</strong> at +<a href="https://github.com">https://github.com</a>. To add a GitHub entry to the footprint library table +the "Library Path" in the footprint library table entry must be set to a +valid GitHub URL.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>For example:</p></div> +<div class="literalblock"> +<div class="content monospaced"> +<pre>https://github.com/liftoff-sr/pretty_footprints</pre> +</div></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Typically GitHub URLs take the form:</p></div> +<div class="literalblock"> +<div class="content monospaced"> +<pre>https://github.com/user_name/repo_name</pre> +</div></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The "Plugin Type" must be set to "Github". To enable the "Copy-On-Write" +feature the option <span class="monospaced">allow_pretty_writing_to_this_dir</span> must be added to the +"Options" setting of the footprint library table entry. This option is the +"Library Path" for local storage of modified copies of footprints read from +the GitHub repo. The footprints saved to this path are combined with the +read-only part of the GitHub repository to create the footprint library. If +this option is missing, then the GitHub library is read-only. If the option +is present for a GitHub library, then any writes to this hybrid library will +go to the local <span class="monospaced">*.pretty</span> directory. Note that the github.com resident +portion of this hybrid COW library is always read-only, meaning you cannot +delete anything or modify any footprint in the specified GitHub repository +directly. The aggregate library type remains "Github" in all further +discussions, but it consists of both the local read/write portion and the +remote read-only portion.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The table below shows a footprint library table entry without the option +<span class="monospaced">allow_pretty_writing_to_this_dir</span>:</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<thead> +<tr> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Nickname </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Library Path </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Plugin Type </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Options </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Description</th> +</tr> +</thead> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">github</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><a href="https://github.com/liftoff-sr/pretty_footprints">https://github.com/liftoff-sr/pretty_footprints</a></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Github</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Liftoff’s GH footprints</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The table below shows a footprint library table entry with the COW option +given. Note the use of the environment variable <span class="monospaced">${HOME}</span> as an example +only. The github.pretty directory is located in <span class="monospaced">${HOME}/pretty/path</span>. +Anytime you use the option <span class="monospaced">allow_pretty_writing_to_this_dir</span>, you will need +to create that directory manually in advance and it must end with the +extension <span class="monospaced">.pretty</span>.</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<thead> +<tr> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Nickname </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Library Path </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Plugin Type </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Options </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Description</th> +</tr> +</thead> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">github</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><a href="https://github.com/liftoff-sr/pretty_footprints">https://github.com/liftoff-sr/pretty_footprints</a></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Github</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Liftoff’s GH footprints</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Footprint loads will always give precedence to the local footprints found in +the path given by the option <span class="monospaced">allow_pretty_writing_to_this_dir</span>. Once you +have saved a footprint to the COW library’s local directory by doing a +footprint save in the Footprint Editor, no GitHub updates will be seen when +loading a footprint with the same name as one for which you’ve saved +locally.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Always keep a separate local <span class="monospaced">*.pretty</span> directory for each GitHub library, +never combine them by referring to the same directory more than once. Also, +do not use the same COW (<span class="monospaced">*.pretty</span>) directory in a footprint library table +entry. This would likely create a mess. The value of the option +<span class="monospaced">allow_pretty_writing_to_this_dir</span> will expand any environment variable +using the <span class="monospaced">${}</span> notation to create the path in the same way as the "Library +Path" setting.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>What’s the point of COW? It is to turbo-charge the sharing of footprints. +If you periodically email your COW pretty footprint modifications to the +GitHub repository maintainer, you can help update the GitHub copy. Simply +email the individual <span class="monospaced">*.kicad_mod</span> files you find in your COW directories to +the maintainer of the GitHub repository. After you’ve received confirmation +that your changes have been committed, you can safely delete your COW +file(s) and the updated footprint from the read-only part of GitHub library +will flow down. Your goal should be to keep the COW file set as small as +possible by contributing frequently to the shared master copies at +<a href="https://github.com">https://github.com</a>.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Finally, Nginx can be used as a cache to the github server to speed up the +loading of footprints. It can be installed locally or on a network +server. There is an example configuration in KiCad sources at +pcbnew/github/nginx.conf. The most straightforward way to get this working +is to overwrite the default nginx.conf with this one and <span class="monospaced">export +KIGITHUB=http://my_server:54321/KiCad</span>, where <span class="monospaced">my_server</span> is the IP or +domain name of the machine running nginx.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_usage_patterns">2.4.7. Usage Patterns</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Footprint libraries can be defined either globally or specifically to the +currently loaded project. Footprint libraries defined in the user’s global +table are always available and are stored in the <span class="monospaced">fp-lib-table</span> file in the +user’s home folder. Global footprint libraries can always be accessed even +when there is no project net list file opened. The project specific +footprint table is active only for the currently open net list file. The +project specific footprint library table is saved in the file fp-lib-table +in the path of the currently open board file. You are free to define +libraries in either table.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>There are advantages and disadvantages to each method:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +You can define all of your libraries in the global table which means they + will always be available when you need them. +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The disadvantage of this is that you may have to search through a lot + of libraries to find the footprint you are looking for. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +You can define all your libraries on a project specific basis. +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The advantage of this is that you only need to define the libraries + you actually need for the project which cuts down on searching. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The disadvantage is that you always have to remember to add each + footprint library that you need for every project. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +You can also define footprint libraries both globally and project + specifically. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>One usage pattern would be to define your most commonly used libraries +globally and the library only required for the project in the project +specific library table. There is no restriction on how you define your +libraries.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_general_operations">3. General operations</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_toolbars_and_commands">3.1. Toolbars and commands</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In Pcbnew it is possible to execute commands using various means:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Text-based menu at the top of the main window. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Top toolbar menu. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Right toolbar menu. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Left toolbar menu. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Mouse buttons (menu options). Specifically: +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The right mouse button reveals a pop-up menu the content of + which depends on the element under the mouse arrow. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Keyboard (Function keys <span class="monospaced">F1</span>, <span class="monospaced">F2</span>, <span class="monospaced">F3</span>, <span class="monospaced">F4</span>, <span class="monospaced">Shift</span>, <span class="monospaced">Delete</span>, <span class="monospaced">+</span>, <span class="monospaced">-</span>, + <span class="monospaced">Page Up</span>, <span class="monospaced">Page Down</span> and <span class="monospaced">Space bar</span>). The <span class="monospaced">Escape</span> key generally cancels + an operation in progress. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The screenshot below illustrates some of the possible accesses to these +operations:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Right-click_legacy_menu.png" alt="images/Right-click_legacy_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_mouse_commands">3.2. Mouse commands</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_basic_commands">3.2.1. Basic commands</h4> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Left button +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Single-click displays the characteristics of the footprint or text under + the cursor in the lower status bar. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Double-click displays the editor (if the element is editable) of the + element under the cursor. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Centre button/wheel +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Rapid zoom and some commands in layer manager. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Hold down the centre button and draw a rectangle to zoom to the + described area. Rotation of the mouse wheel will allow you to zoom + in and zoom out. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Right button +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Displays a pop-up menu +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_operations_on_blocks">3.2.2. Operations on blocks</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Operations to move, invert (mirror), copy, rotate and delete a block are all +available via the pop-up menu. In addition, the view can zoom to the area +described by the block.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The framework of the block is traced by moving the mouse while holding down +the left mouse button. The operation is executed when the button is +released.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>By holding down one of the hotkeys <span class="monospaced">Shift</span> or <span class="monospaced">Ctrl</span>, or both keys <span class="monospaced">Shift</span> +and <span class="monospaced">Ctrl</span> together, while the block is drawn the operation invert, rotate +or delete is automatically selected as shown in the table below:</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<thead> +<tr> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Action </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Effect</th> +</tr> +</thead> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Left mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Trace framework to move block</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="monospaced">Shift</span> + Left mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Trace framework for invert block</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="monospaced">Ctrl</span> + Left mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Trace framework for rotating block 90°</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="monospaced">Shift</span> + <span class="monospaced">Ctrl</span> + Left mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Trace framework to delete the block</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Centre mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Trace framework to zoom to block</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When moving a block:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Move block to new position and operate left mouse button to place the + elements. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +To cancel the operation use the right mouse button and select Cancel Block + from the menu (or press the <span class="monospaced">Esc</span> key). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Alternatively if no key is pressed when drawing the block use the right +mouse button to display the pop-up menu and select the required operation.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>For each block operation a selection window enables the action to be limited +to only some elements.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_selection_of_grid_size">3.3. Selection of grid size</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>During element layout the cursor moves on a grid. The grid can be turned on +or off using the icon on the left toolbar.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Any of the pre-defined grid sizes, or a User Defined grid, can be chosen +using the pop-up window, or the drop-down selector on the toolbar at the top +of the screen. The size of the User Defined grid is set using the menu bar +option Dimensions → User Grid Size.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_adjustment_of_the_zoom_level">3.4. Adjustment of the zoom level</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The zoom level can be changed using any of the following methods:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Open the pop-up window (using the right mouse button) and then select the + desired zoom. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Use the following function keys: +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<span class="monospaced">F1</span>: Enlarge (zoom in) +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<span class="monospaced">F2</span>: Reduce (zoom out) +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<span class="monospaced">F3</span>: Redraw the display +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<span class="monospaced">F4</span>: Centre view at the current cursor position +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Rotate the mouse wheel. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Hold down the middle mouse button and draw a rectangle to zoom to the + described area. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_displaying_cursor_coordinates">3.5. Displaying cursor coordinates</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The cursor coordinates are displayed in inches or millimetres as selected +using the <em>In</em> or <em>mm</em> icons on the left hand side toolbar.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Whichever unit is selected Pcbnew always works to a precision of 1/10,000 of +inch.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The status bar at the bottom of the screen gives:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The current zoom setting. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The absolute position of the cursor. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The relative position of the cursor. Note the relative coordinates (x,y) can + be set to (0,0) at any position by pressing the space bar. The cursor + position is then displayed relative to this new datum. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In addition the relative position of the cursor can be displayed using its +polar co-ordinates (ray + angle). This can be turned on and off using the +icon in the left hand side toolbar.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_coordinate_status_display.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_coordinate_status_display.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_keyboard_commands_hotkeys">3.6. Keyboard commands - hotkeys</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Many commands are accessible directly with the keyboard. Selection can be +either upper or lower case. Most hot keys are shown in menus. Some hot keys +that do not appear are:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<span class="monospaced">Delete</span>: deletes a footprint or a track. (<em>Available only if the Footprint + mode or the Track mode is active</em>) +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<span class="monospaced">V</span>: if the track tool is active switches working layer or place via, if a + track is in progress. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<span class="monospaced">+</span> and <span class="monospaced">-</span>: select next or previous layer. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<span class="monospaced">?</span>: display the list of all hot keys. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<span class="monospaced">Space</span>: reset relative coordinates. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_operation_on_blocks">3.7. Operation on blocks</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Operations to move, invert (mirror), copy, rotate and delete a block are all +available from the pop-up menu. In addition, the view can zoom to that +described by the block.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The framework of the block is traced by moving the mouse while holding down +the left mouse button. The operation is executed when the button is +released.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>By holding down one of the keys <span class="monospaced">Shift</span> or <span class="monospaced">Ctrl</span>, both <span class="monospaced">Shift</span> and <span class="monospaced">Ctrl</span> +together, or <span class="monospaced">Alt</span>, while the block is drawn the operation invert, rotate, +delete or copy is automatically selected as shown in the table below:</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<thead> +<tr> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Action </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Effect</th> +</tr> +</thead> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Left mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Move block</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="monospaced">Shift</span> + Left mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Invert (mirror) block</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="monospaced">Ctrl</span> + Left mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Rotate block 90°</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="monospaced">Shift</span> + <span class="monospaced">Ctrl</span> + Left mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Delete the block</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="monospaced">Alt</span> + Left mouse button held down</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Copy the block</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When a block command is made, a dialog window is displayed, and items +involved in this command can be chosen.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Any of the commands above can be cancelled via the same pop-up menu or by +pressing the Escape key (<span class="monospaced">Esc</span>).</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_legacy_block_selection_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_legacy_block_selection_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_units_used_in_dialogs">3.8. Units used in dialogs</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Units used to display dimensions values are inch and mm. The desired unit +can be selected by pressing the icon located in left toolbar: +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/unit_inch.png" alt="images/icons/unit_inch.png"> +</span> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/unit_mm.png" alt="images/icons/unit_mm.png"> +</span> However +one can enter the unit used to define a value, when entering a new value.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Accepted units are:</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">1 <strong>in</strong></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">1 inch</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">1 <strong>"</strong></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">1 inch</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">25 <strong>th</strong></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">25 thou</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">25 <strong>mi</strong></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">25 mils, same as thou</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">6 <strong>mm</strong></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">6 mm</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The rules are:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Spaces between the number and the unit are accepted. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Only the first two letters are significant. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +In countries using an alternative decimal separator than the period, the + period (<span class="monospaced">.</span>) can be used as well. Therefore <span class="monospaced">1,5</span> and <span class="monospaced">1.5</span> are the same in + French. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_top_menu_bar">3.9. Top menu bar</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The top menu bar provides access to the files (loading and saving), +configuration options, printing, plotting and the help files.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_top_menu_bar.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_top_menu_bar.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_the_file_menu">3.9.1. The File menu</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_file_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_file_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The File menu allows the loading and saving of printed circuits files, as +well as printing and plotting the circuit board. It enables the export (with +the format GenCAD 1.4) of the circuit for use with automatic testers.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_edit_menu">3.9.2. Edit menu</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Allows some global edit actions:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_edit_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_edit_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_view_menu">3.9.3. View menu</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_view_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_view_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Zoom functions and 3D board display.</p></div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_3d_viewer">3D Viewer</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Opens the 3D Viewer. Here is a sample:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Sample_3D_board.png" alt="images/Sample_3D_board.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_switch_canvas">Switch canvas</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Allows switching canvas.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +default +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +OpenGL +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Cairo +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_place_menu">3.9.4. Place menu</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Same function as the right-hand toolbar.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_place_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_place_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_route_menu">3.9.5. Route menu</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Routing function.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_route_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_route_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_il_menu_delle_preferenze">3.9.6. Il menu delle preferenze</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_preferences_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_preferences_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Allows:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Selection of the footprint libraries. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Hide/Show the Layers manager (colors selection for displaying layers and + other elements. Also enables the display of elements to be turned on and + off). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Management of general options (units, etc.). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The management of other display options. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Creation, editing (and re-read) of the hot keys file. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_menu_dimensioni">3.9.7. Menu dimensioni</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_dimensions_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_dimensions_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>An important menu. Allows adjustment of:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +User grid size. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Size of texts and the line width for drawings. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Dimensions and characteristic of pads. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Setting the global values for solder mask and solder paste layers +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_tools_menu">3.9.8. Tools menu</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_tools_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_tools_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_the_design_rules_menu">3.9.9. The Design Rules menu</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Provides access to 2 dialogs:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Impostazione regole di progettazione (dimensioni piste e via, isolamenti). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Setting Layers (number, enabled and layers names) +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_il_menu_di_aiuto">3.9.10. Il menu di aiuto</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Provides access to the user manuals and to the version information menu +(Pcbnew About).</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_uso_delle_icone_nella_barra_in_cima">3.10. Uso delle icone nella barra in cima</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This toolbar gives access to the principal functions of Pcbnew.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_top_toolbar.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_top_toolbar.png"> +</div> +</div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:28%;"> +<col style="width:71%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/new.png" alt="images/icons/new.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Creation of a new printed circuit.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/open_brd_file.png" alt="images/icons/open_brd_file.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Opening of an old printed circuit.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/save.png" alt="images/icons/save.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Save printed circuit.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/sheetset.png" alt="images/icons/sheetset.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selection of the page size and modification of the file properties.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/module_editor.png" alt="images/icons/module_editor.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Opens Footprint Editor to edit library or pcb footprint.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/modview_icon.png" alt="images/icons/modview_icon.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Opens Footprint Viewer to display library or pcb footprint.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/undo.png" alt="images/icons/undo.png"> +</span> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/redo.png" alt="images/icons/redo.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Undo/Redo last commands (10 levels)</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/print_button.png" alt="images/icons/print_button.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Display print menu.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/plot.png" alt="images/icons/plot.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Display plot menu.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/zoom_in.png" alt="images/icons/zoom_in.png"> +</span> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/zoom_out.png" alt="images/icons/zoom_out.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Zoom in and Zoom out (relative to the centre of screen).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/zoom_redraw.png" alt="images/icons/zoom_redraw.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Redraw the screen</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/zoom_fit_in_page.png" alt="images/icons/zoom_fit_in_page.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Fit to page</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/find.png" alt="images/icons/find.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Find footprint or text.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/netlist.png" alt="images/icons/netlist.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Netlist operations (selection, reading, testing and compiling).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/drc.png" alt="images/icons/drc.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">DRC (Design Rule Check): Automatic check of the tracks.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_toolbar_layer_select_dropdown.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_toolbar_layer_select_dropdown.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selection of the working layer.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_layer_pair_indicator.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_layer_pair_indicator.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selection of layer pair (for vias)</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_module.png" alt="images/icons/mode_module.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Footprint mode: when active this enables footprint options in the + pop-up window.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_track.png" alt="images/icons/mode_track.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Routing mode: when active this enables routing options in the + pop-up window</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/web_support.png" alt="images/icons/web_support.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Direct access to the router Freerouter</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/py_script.png" alt="images/icons/py_script.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Show / Hide the Python scripting console</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_auxiliary_toolbar">3.10.1. Auxiliary toolbar</h4> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:28%;"> +<col style="width:71%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_thickness_dropdown.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_thickness_dropdown.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selection of thickness of track already in use.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_via_size_dropdown.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_via_size_dropdown.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selection of a dimension of via already in use.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/auto_track_width.png" alt="images/icons/auto_track_width.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Automatic track width: if enabled when creating a new track, + when starting on an existing track, the width of the new track + is set to the width of the existing track.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_grid_size_dropdown.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_grid_size_dropdown.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selection of the grid size.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zoom_factor_dropdown.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zoom_factor_dropdown.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selection of the zoom.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div style="page-break-after:always"></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_right_hand_side_toolbar">3.11. Right-hand side toolbar</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This toolbar gives access to the editing tool to change the PCB shown in +Pcbnew.</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:10%;"> +<col style="width:5%;"> +<col style="width:85%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-center valign-middle" rowspan="16" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_right_toolbar.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_right_toolbar.png" width="80%"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/cursor.png" alt="images/icons/cursor.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Select the standard mouse mode.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/net_highlight.png" alt="images/icons/net_highlight.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Highlight net selected by clicking on a track or pad.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/tool_ratsnest.png" alt="images/icons/tool_ratsnest.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Display local ratsnest (Pad or Footprint).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/module.png" alt="images/icons/module.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Add a footprint from a library.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_tracks.png" alt="images/icons/add_tracks.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Placement of tracks and vias.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_zone.png" alt="images/icons/add_zone.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Placement of zones (copper planes).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_keepout_area.png" alt="images/icons/add_keepout_area.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Placement of keepout areas ( on copper layers ).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_dashed_line.png" alt="images/icons/add_dashed_line.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Draw Lines on technical layers (i.e. not a copper layer).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_circle.png" alt="images/icons/add_circle.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Draw Circles on technical layers (i.e. not a copper layer).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_arc.png" alt="images/icons/add_arc.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Draw Arcs on technical layers (i.e. not a copper layer).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_text.png" alt="images/icons/add_text.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Placement of text.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_dimension.png" alt="images/icons/add_dimension.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Draw Dimensions on technical layers (i.e. not the copper layer).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_mires.png" alt="images/icons/add_mires.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Draw Alignment Marks (appearing on all layers).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/delete.png" alt="images/icons/delete.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Delete element pointed to by the cursor</p> +<p class="tableblock"> <strong>Note:</strong> + When Deleting, if several superimposed elements are + pointed to, priority is given to the smallest (in the decreasing + set of priorities tracks, text, footprint). The function "Undelete" + of the upper toolbar allows the cancellation of the last item + deleted.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/pcb_offset.png" alt="images/icons/pcb_offset.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Offset adjust for drilling and place files.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/grid_select_axis.png" alt="images/icons/grid_select_axis.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Grid origin. (grid offset). Useful mainly for editing and + placement of footprints. Can also be set in Dimensions/Grid menu.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Placement of footprints, tracks, zones of copper, texts, etc. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Net Highlighting. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Creating notes, graphic elements, etc. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Eliminare elementi. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div style="page-break-after:always"></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_left_hand_side_toolbar">3.12. Left-hand side toolbar</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The left hand-side toolbar provides display and control options that affect +Pcbnew’s interface.</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:10%;"> +<col style="width:5%;"> +<col style="width:85%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-center valign-middle" rowspan="17" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_left_toolbar.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_left_toolbar.png" width="80%"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/drc_off.png" alt="images/icons/drc_off.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Turns DRC (Design Rule Checking) on/off. <strong>Caution:</strong> when DRC + is off incorrect connections can be made.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/grid.png" alt="images/icons/grid.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Turn grid display on/off <strong>Note:</strong> a small grid may not be displayed + unless zoomed in far enough</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/polar_coord.png" alt="images/icons/polar_coord.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Polar display of the relative co-ordinates on the status bar on/off.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/unit_inch.png" alt="images/icons/unit_inch.png"> +</span> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/unit_mm.png" alt="images/icons/unit_mm.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Display/entry of coordinates or dimensions in inches or millimeters.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/cursor_shape.png" alt="images/icons/cursor_shape.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Change cursor display shape.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/general_ratsnest.png" alt="images/icons/general_ratsnest.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Display general rats nest (incomplete connections between footprints).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/local_ratsnest.png" alt="images/icons/local_ratsnest.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Display footprint rats nest dynamically as it is moved.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/auto_delete_track.png" alt="images/icons/auto_delete_track.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Enable/Disable automatic deletion of a track when it is redrawn.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/show_zone.png" alt="images/icons/show_zone.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Show filled areas in zones</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/show_zone_disable.png" alt="images/icons/show_zone_disable.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Do not show filled areas in zones</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/show_zone_outline_only.png" alt="images/icons/show_zone_outline_only.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Show only outlines of filled areas in zones</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/pad_sketch.png" alt="images/icons/pad_sketch.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Display of pads in outline mode on/off.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/via_sketch.png" alt="images/icons/via_sketch.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Display of vias in outline mode on/off.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/showtrack.png" alt="images/icons/showtrack.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Display of tracks in outline mode on/off.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/contrast_mode.png" alt="images/icons/contrast_mode.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">High contrast display mode on/off. In this mode the active + layer is displayed normally, all the other layers are displayed + in gray. Useful for working on multi-layer circuits.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/layers_manager.png" alt="images/icons/layers_manager.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Hide/Show the Layers manager</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mw_toolbar.png" alt="images/icons/mw_toolbar.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Access to microwaves tools. Under development</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_pop_up_windows_and_fast_editing">3.13. Pop-up windows and fast editing</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A right-click of the mouse opens a pop-up window. Its contents depends on +the element pointed at by the cursor.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This gives immediate access to:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Changing the display (centre display on cursor, zoom in or out or selecting + the zoom). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Setting the grid size. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Additionally a right-click on an element enables editing of the most + commonly modified element parameters. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The screenshots below show what the pop-up windows looks like.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_available_modes">3.14. Available modes</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>There are 3 modes when using pop-up menus. In the pop-up menus, these modes +add or remove some specific commands.</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:28%;"> +<col style="width:71%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_module.png" alt="images/icons/mode_module.png"> +</span> and + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_track.png" alt="images/icons/mode_track.png"> +</span> disabled</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Normal mode</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_module.png" alt="images/icons/mode_module.png"> +</span> enabled</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Footprint mode</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_track.png" alt="images/icons/mode_track.png"> +</span> enabled</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Tracks mode</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_normal_mode">3.14.1. Normal mode</h4> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pop-up menu with no selection: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_popup_normal_mode.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_popup_normal_mode.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pop-up menu with track selected: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_popup_normal_mode_track.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_popup_normal_mode_track.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pop-up menu with footprint selected: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_popup_normal_mode_footprint.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_popup_normal_mode_footprint.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_footprint_mode">3.14.2. Footprint mode</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Same cases in Footprint Mode (<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_module.png" alt="images/icons/mode_module.png"> +</span> enabled)</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pop-up menu with no selection: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_popup_footprint_mode.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_popup_footprint_mode.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pop-up menu with track selected: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_popup_footprint_mode_track.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_popup_footprint_mode_track.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pop-up menu with footprint selected: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_popup_footprint_mode_footprint.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_popup_footprint_mode_footprint.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_tracks_mode">3.14.3. Tracks mode</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Same cases in Track Mode (<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_track.png" alt="images/icons/mode_track.png"> +</span> enabled)</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pop-up menu with no selection: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_popup_track_mode.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_popup_track_mode.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pop-up menu with track selected: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_popup_track_mode_track.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_popup_track_mode_track.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pop-up menu with footprint selected: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_popup_track_mode_footprint.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_popup_track_mode_footprint.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_implementazione_schemi">4. Implementazione schemi</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_collegamento_di_uno_schema_ad_un_circuito_stampato">4.1. Collegamento di uno schema ad un circuito stampato</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In generale, uno schema elettrico è connesso con il suo circuito stampato +per mezzo del file di netlist, che normalmente viene generato dall’editor +degli schemi elettrici usato per creare lo schema. Pcbnew accetta file di +netlist creati con Eeschema o Orcad PCB 2. Al file di netlist, generato +dall’editor degli schemi elettrici, solitamente mancano le impronte che +corrispondono ai vari componenti. Di conseguenza si rende necessario uno +stadio intermedio. Durante questo processo intermedio viene eseguita +l’associazione tra componenti e impronte. In KiCad, si usa il programma +CvPcb per creare questa associazione e viene prodotto un file di nome +<span class="monospaced">*.cmp</span>. CvPcb aggiorna anche il file di netlist usando queste informazioni.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>CvPcb può anche generare un “file di cose” <span class="monospaced">*.stf</span> che possono essere +back-annotate nel file dello schema elettrico come il campo F2 per ogni +componente, risparmiandoci il compito di ri-assegnare le impronte in ogni +passaggio di modifica dello schema elettrico. In Eeschema la copia di un +componente copierà anche l’assegnazione dell’impronta e reimposterà il +riferimento come non assegnato per la successiva annotazione auto +incrementale.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew legge il file di netlist modificato <span class="monospaced">.net</span> e, se esiste, il file +<span class="monospaced">.cmp</span>. Nell’eventualità che una impronta sia stata cambiata direttamente in +Pcbnew il file <span class="monospaced">.cmp</span> viene automaticamente aggiornato evitando la necessità +di eseguire nuovamente CvPcb.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Fare riferimento alla immagine del manuale “Introduzione a KiCad” nella +sezione <em>Diagramma di flusso di KiCad</em> che illustra il flusso di lavoro di +KiCad e come i file intermedi vengano ottenuti e usati dai diversi strumenti +software che compongono KiCad.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_procedura_per_la_creazione_di_un_circuito_stampato">4.2. Procedura per la creazione di un circuito stampato</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Dopo aver creato il prorio schema in Eeschema:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Generare la netlist usando Eeschema. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Assegnare ogni componente nel file di netlist alla forma sul circuito + stampato (detta anche impronta) corrispondente usata sul circuito stampato + usando Cvpcb. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Avviare Pcbnew e leggere il file di netlist modificato. Ciò leggerà anche il + file con le selezioni delle impronte. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew quindi caricherà automaticamente tutte le impronte necessarie. Ora +le impronte possono essere piazzate manualmente o automaticamente sulla +scheda e si possono collegare le piste.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_procedura_per_aggiornare_un_circuito_stampato">4.3. Procedura per aggiornare un circuito stampato</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se lo schema elettrico viene modificato (dopo la produzione del circuito +stampato), si devono ripetere i seguenti passi:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Generare un nuovo file di netlist usando Eeschema. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Se i cambiamenti allo schema comprendono nuovi componenti, le impronte + corrispondenti devono essere assegnate usando Cvpcb. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Eseguire Pcbnew e rileggere la netlist modificata (ciò comporterà anche la + rilettura del file con le selezioni delle impronte). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew allora caricherà automaticamente ogni nuova impronta, aggiungendo le +nuove connessioni e rimuovendo quelle ridondanti. Questo processo viene +chiamato forward annotation ed è una procedura molto comune quando si crea +ed aggiorna un circuito stampato.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_lettura_del_file_netlist_caricamento_impronte">4.4. Lettura del file netlist - caricamento impronte</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_finestra_di_dialogo">4.4.1. Finestra di dialogo</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Accessibile dall’icona <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/netlist.png" alt="images/icons/netlist.png"> +</span></p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/it/Pcbnew_netlist_dialog.png" alt="images/it/Pcbnew_netlist_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_opzioni_disponibili">4.4.2. Opzioni disponibili</h4> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selezione impronte</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Componenti e collegamento impronte corrispondenti sulla scheda: +il collegamento normale è il riferimento (come opzione normale +la marcatura temporale può essere usata dopo la riannotazione dello schema, se l’annotazione +precedente era andata persa (opzione speciale)</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Scambio impronte:</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Se un’impronta è cambiata nella netlist: mantieni la vecchia impronta o +cambia con la nuova versione.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Piste non connesse</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Mantiene tutte le piste esistenti, o cancella le piste errate</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Impronte extra</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Rimuovi le impronte presenti sulla scheda ma non nella netlist. +Le impronte con attributo "Bloccata" non saranno rimosse.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Collegamenti a piazzola singola</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Rimuovi i collegamenti a singola piazzole.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_caricamento_nuove_impronte">4.4.3. Caricamento nuove impronte</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Con la visualizzazione GAL quando nuove impronte vengono rilevate nel file +netlist, queste vengono caricate, sparse, e rese disponibili per il +piazzamento come grupo dove si desidera.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_import_spread_footprints.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_import_spread_footprints.png" height="300"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Con la visualizzazione tradizionale quando le nuove impronte vengono +rilevate nel file netlist, queste vengono automaticamente caricate e +piazzate alle coordinate (0,0).</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_stacked_footprints.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_stacked_footprints.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le nuove impronte possono essere spostate e sistemate una ad una. Un modo +migliore per spostarle automaticamente è:</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Attivazione della modalità impronta (<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_module.png" alt="images/icons/mode_module.png"> +</span>)</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Spostare il puntatore del mouse in un’area consona (libera da componenti) e +fare clic con il tasto destro del mouse:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_move_all_modules.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_move_all_modules.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Posiziona automaticamente le nuove impronte, se c'è già una scheda con + impronte preesistenti. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Posiziona automaticamente tutte le impronte, per la prima volta (quando si + crea una scheda). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La schermata seguente mostra i risultati.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_unstacked_footprints.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_unstacked_footprints.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_strati">5. Strati</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_introduzione">5.1. Introduzione</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew può lavorare con 50 strati diversi:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Tra 1 e 32 strati rame per lo sbroglio piste. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +14 strati tecnici di funzione prefissata: +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +12 strati appaiati (fronte/retro): <strong>Adhesive</strong>, <strong>Solder Paste</strong>, + <strong>Silk Screen</strong>, <strong>Solder Mask</strong>, <strong>Courtyard</strong>, <strong>Fabrication</strong> +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +2 strati singoli: <strong>Edge Cuts</strong>, <strong>Margin</strong> +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +4 strati ausiliari che si può usare a piacimento: <strong>Comments</strong>, <strong>E.C.O. 1</strong>, + <strong>E.C.O. 2</strong>, <strong>Drawings</strong> +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_impostazione_degli_strati">5.2. Impostazione degli strati</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>To open the <strong>Layers Setup</strong> from the menu bar, select <strong>Design Rules</strong> → +<strong>Layers Setup</strong>.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il numero di strati rame, i loro nomi e le loro funzioni, vengono impostati +in questa sede. Gli strati tecnici non usati possono essere disabilitati.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_layer_setup_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_layer_setup_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_descrizione_strati">5.3. Descrizione strati</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_selezione_degli_strati_rame">5.3.1. Selezione degli strati rame</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Copper layers are the usual working layers used to place and re-arrange +tracks. Layer numbers start from 0 (the first copper layer, on Front) and +end at 31 (Back). Since components cannot be placed in <strong>inner layers</strong> +(number 1 to 30), only layers number 0 and 31 are <strong>component layer</strong>.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The name of any copper layer is editable. Copper layers have a function +attribute that is useful when using the external router <em>Freerouter</em>. +Example of default layer names are <strong>F.Cu</strong> and <strong>In0</strong> for layer number 0.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_layer_setup_dialog_layer_properties.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_layer_setup_dialog_layer_properties.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_paired_technical_layers">5.3.2. Paired Technical Layers</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>12 technical layers come in pairs: one for the front, one for the back. You +can recognize them with the "F." or "B." prefix in their names. The elements +making up a footprint (pad, drawing, text) of one of these layers are +automatically mirrored and moved to the complementary layer when the +footprint is flipped.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The paired technical layers are:</p></div> +<div class="dlist"><dl> +<dt class="hdlist1"> +<strong>Adhesive</strong> (F.Adhes and B.Adhes) +</dt> +<dd> +<p> + These are used in the application of adhesive to stick SMD components to the + circuit board, generally before wave soldering. +</p> +</dd> +<dt class="hdlist1"> +<strong>Solder Paste</strong> (F.Paste and B.Paste) +</dt> +<dd> +<p> + Used to produce a mask to allow solder paste to be placed on the pads of + surface mount components, generally before reflow soldering. Usually only + surface mount pads occupy these layers. +</p> +</dd> +<dt class="hdlist1"> +<strong>Silk Screen</strong> (F.SilkS and B.SilkS) +</dt> +<dd> +<p> + They are the layers where the drawings of the components appear. That’s + where you draw things like component polarity, first pin indicator, + reference for mounting, … +</p> +</dd> +<dt class="hdlist1"> +<strong>Solder Mask</strong> (F.Mask and B.Mask) +</dt> +<dd> +<p> + These define the solder masks. All pads should appear on one of these layers + (SMT) or both (for through hole) to prevent the varnish from covering the + pads. +</p> +</dd> +<dt class="hdlist1"> +<strong>Courtyard</strong> (F.CrtYd and B.CrtYd) +</dt> +<dd> +<p> + Used to show how much space a component physically takes on the PCB. +</p> +</dd> +<dt class="hdlist1"> +<strong>Fabrication</strong> (F.Fab and B.Fab) +</dt> +<dd> +<p> + Footprint assembly (?). +</p> +</dd> +</dl></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_independant_technical_layers">5.3.3. Independant Technical Layers</h4> +<div class="dlist"><dl> +<dt class="hdlist1"> +<strong>Edge.Cuts</strong> +</dt> +<dd> +<p> + This layer is reserved for the drawing of circuit board outline. Any element + (graphic, texts…) placed on this layer appears on all the other + layers. Use this layer only to draw board outlines. +</p> +</dd> +<dt class="hdlist1"> +<strong>Margin</strong> +</dt> +<dd> +<p> + Board’s edge setback outline (?). +</p> +</dd> +</dl></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_layers_for_general_use">5.3.4. Layers for general use</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>These layers are for any use. They can be used for text such as instructions +for assembly or wiring, or construction drawings, to be used to create a +file for assembly or machining. Their names are:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Comments +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +E.C.O. 1 +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +E.C.O. 2 +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Drawings +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_selection_of_the_active_layer">5.4. Selection of the active layer</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The selection of the active working layer can be done in several ways:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Using the right toolbar (Layer manager). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Using the upper toolbar. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +With the pop-up window (activated with the right mouse button). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Using the + and - keys (works on copper layers only). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +By hot keys. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_selection_using_the_layer_manager">5.4.1. Selection using the layer manager</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_layer_manager_pane.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_layer_manager_pane.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_selection_using_the_upper_toolbar">5.4.2. Selection using the upper toolbar</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_layer_selection_dropdown.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_layer_selection_dropdown.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This directly selects the working layer.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Hot keys to select the working layer are displayed.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_selection_using_the_pop_up_window">5.4.3. Selection using the pop-up window</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_layer_selection_popup.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_layer_selection_popup.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The Pop-up window opens a menu window which provides a choice for the +working layer.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_layer_selection_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_layer_selection_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_selection_of_the_layers_for_vias">5.5. Selection of the Layers for Vias</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If the <strong>Add Tracks and Vias</strong> icon is selected on the right hand toolbar, the +Pop-Up window provides the option to change the layer pair used for vias:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_via_layer_pair_popup.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_via_layer_pair_popup.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This selection opens a menu window which provides choice of the layers used +for vias.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_via_layer_pair_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_via_layer_pair_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When a via is placed the working (active) layer is automatically switched to +the alternate layer of the layer pair used for the vias.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>One can also switch to another active layer by hot keys, and if a track is +in progress, a via will be inserted.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_using_the_high_contrast_mode">5.6. Using the high-contrast mode</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This mode is entered when the tool (in the left toolbar) is activated: +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/contrast_mode.png" alt="images/icons/contrast_mode.png"> +</span></p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When using this mode, the active layer is displayed like in the normal mode, +but all others layers are displayed in gray color.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>There are two useful cases:</p></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_copper_layers_in_high_contrast_mode">5.6.1. Copper layers in high-contrast mode</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When a board uses more than four layers, this option allows the active +copper layer to be seen more easily:</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Normal mode</strong> (back side copper layer active):</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_copper_layers_contrast_normal.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_copper_layers_contrast_normal.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>High-contrast mode</strong> (back side copper layer active):</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_copper_layers_contrast_high.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_copper_layers_contrast_high.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_technical_layers">5.6.2. Technical layers</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The other case is when it is necessary to examine solder paste layers and +solder mask layers which are usually not displayed.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Masks on pads are displayed if this mode is active.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>Normal mode</strong> (front side solder mask layer active):</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_technical_layers_contrast_normal.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_technical_layers_contrast_normal.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p><strong>High-contrast mode</strong> (front side solder mask layer active):</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_technical_layers_contrast_high.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_technical_layers_contrast_high.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_crea_e_modifica_una_scheda">6. Crea e modifica una scheda</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_creazione_di_una_scheda">6.1. Creazione di una scheda</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_disegno_dei_contorni_della_scheda">6.1.1. Disegno dei contorni della scheda</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Solitamente è considerata una buona idea definire per prima cosa i bordi +della scheda. I bordi si disegnano con una sequenza di segmenti di +linea. Selezionare <em>Edge.Cuts</em> come strato attivo e usare lo strumento +“Aggiungi linea o poligono grafico” per tracciare il bordo, facendo clic +alla posizione di ogni vertice e facendo doppio clic per finire. Le schede +di solito hanno dimensioni molto precise, perciò potrebbe essere necessario +usare le coordinate mostrate del puntatore durante la tracciatura del +contorno. Tenere a mente che le coordinate relative possono essere azzerate +in qualsiasi momento usando la barra spaziatrice, e che le unità di misura +mostrate possono essere abilitate/disabilitate usando la combinazione +“Ctrl-U”. Le coordinate relative consentono disegni di dimensioni molto +precise. È possibile disegnare un contorno circolare (o arcuato):</p></div> +<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> +<li> +<p> +Selezionare lo strumento “Aggiungi cerchio grafico” o “Aggiungi arco + grafico” +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Fare clic per fissare il centro del cerchio +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Regolare il raggio muovendo il mouse +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Terminare facendo nuovamente clic. +</p> +</li> +</ol></div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Nota</div> +</td> +<td class="content">La larghezza del bordo può essere regolata, nel menu Parametri (larghezza +raccomandata = 150 in decimi di mils) o attraverso le Opzioni, ma questa non +sarà visibile a meno che la grafica non sia mostrata in una modalità diversa +da contorni.</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il bordo risultante dovrebbe somigliare a questo:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_simple_board_outline.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_simple_board_outline.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_uso_di_disegno_dxf_per_il_contorno_scheda">6.1.2. Uso di disegno DXF per il contorno scheda</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In alternativa a disegnare il contorno scheda direttamente in Pcbnew, questo +può essere importato da un disegno DXF.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Usando questa funzione si possono creare forme di schede più complesse di +quelle che si otterrebbe sfruttando solamente le capacità di disegno interne +di Pcbnew.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per esempio un pacchetto CAD meccanico può essere usato per definire la +forma della scheda giusta per un contenitore particolare.</p></div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_preparazione_di_un_disegno_dxf_per_contorno_scheda">Preparazione di un disegno DXF per contorno scheda</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le capacità di importazione <strong>DXF</strong> di KiCad non includono il supporto a +caratteristiche DXF come <strong>POLYLINE</strong> e <strong>ELLISSI</strong> e i file DXF che usano +queste caratteristiche richiedono alcuni passi aggiuntivi di conversione per +prepararli all’importazione.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per questa conversione si può usare un pacchetto software come LibreCAD.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Come primo passo, tutte le <strong>POLILINEE</strong> devono essere divise (esplose) nelle +loro oiginali forme più semplici. In LibreCAD usare i passi seguenti:</p></div> +<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> +<li> +<p> +Aprire una copia del file DXF. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Selezionare la forma della scheda (le forme selezionate sono mostrate con + linee tratteggiate). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Nel menu <strong>Modifica</strong>, selezionare <strong>Esplodi</strong>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Premere INVIO. +</p> +</li> +</ol></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Come prossimo passo, curve complesse come le <strong>ELLISSI</strong> vanno spezzate in +segmenti di linea più piccoli che <em>approssimano</em> la forma desiderata. Questo +accade automaticamente quando il file DXF viene esportato o salvato nel +vecchio formato file <strong>DXF R12</strong> (dato che il formato R12 non supporta forme +dalle curve complesse, le applicazioni CAD convertono queste forme in +segmenti di linea. Alcune applicazioni CAD permettono la configurazione del +numero o della lunghezza dei segmenti di linea usati). In LibreCAD la +lunghezza dei segmenti è generalmente abbastanza piccola da poter essere +usata per le forme dei circuiti stampati.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In LibreCAD, usare i passi seguenti per esportare nel formato file <strong>DXF +R12</strong>:</p></div> +<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> +<li> +<p> +Nel menu <strong>File</strong>, usare <strong>Salva con nome…</strong> +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Nella finestra di dialogo <strong>Salva disegno come</strong>, c'è un selettore <strong>Salva + come:</strong> in fondo a destra della finestra di dialogo. Selezionare l’opzione + <strong>Drawing Exchange DXF R12</strong>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Opzionalmente inserire un nome fiel nel campo <strong>Nome file:</strong>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Fare clic su <strong>Salva</strong> +</p> +</li> +</ol></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il file DXF è ora pronto per l’importazione in KiCad.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_importare_il_file_dxf_in_kicad">Importare il file DXF in KiCad</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>I passi seguenti descrivono l’importazione del file DXF preparato come forma +di circuito stampato in KiCad. Si noti che il comportamento di importazione +è leggermente differente a seconda della modalità <em>schermo</em> usata.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Uso nella modalità schermo “predefinita”:</p></div> +<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> +<li> +<p> +Nel menu <strong>File</strong>, selezionare <strong>Importa</strong> e poi l’opzione <strong>File DXF</strong>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Nella finestra di dialogo <strong>Importa file DXF</strong> usare <em>Esplora</em> per selezionare + il file DXF preparato per essere importato. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Nell’opzione <em>Posiziona punto origine DXF (0,0):</em>, impostare il punto + dell’origine DXF relativa alle coordinate della scheda (la scheda KiCad ha + (0,0) nell’angolo in alto a sinistra). Per <em>Posizione personalizzata</em> + inserire le coordinate nei campi <em>Posizione X:</em> e <em>Posizione Y</em>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Nella selezione <em>Strati</em>, selezionare lo strato della scheda da + importare. Per i contorni scheda serve <strong>Edge.Cuts</strong>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Fare clic su <em>OK</em>. +</p> +</li> +</ol></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Uso nelle modalità schermo “OpenGL” o “Cairo”:</p></div> +<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> +<li> +<p> +Nel menu <strong>File</strong>, selezionare <strong>Importa</strong> e poi l’opzione <strong>File DXF</strong>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Nella finestra di dialogo <strong>Importa file DXF</strong> usare <em>Esplora</em> per selezionare + il file DXF preparato per essere importato. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +L’impostazione dell’opzione <em>Posiziona punto origine DXF (0,0):</em> viene + ignorata in questa modalità. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Nella selezione <em>Strati</em>, selezionare lo strato della scheda da + importare. Per i contorni scheda serve <strong>Edge.Cuts</strong>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Fare clic su <em>OK</em>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +La forma è ora attaccata al proprio cursore e può essere spostata sull’area + della scheda. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Fare clic per <em>depositare</em> la forma sulla scheda. +</p> +</li> +</ol></div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_esempio_di_forma_dxf_importata">Esempio di forma DXF importata</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ecco un esempio di importazione DXF con una scheda che ha diversi segmenti +ellittici approssimati da una serie di corti segmenti di linea:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_board_outline_imported_from_a_DXF.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_board_outline_imported_from_a_DXF.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_lettura_della_netlist_generata_dallo_schema_elettrico">6.1.3. Lettura della netlist generata dallo schema elettrico</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Attivare l’icona <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/netlist.png" alt="images/icons/netlist.png"> +</span> per mostrare la finestra +di dialogo della netlist:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/it/Pcbnew_netlist_dialog.png" alt="images/it/Pcbnew_netlist_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se il nome (percorso) della netlist nel titolo della finestra è sbagliato, +usare il pulsante <em>Seleziona</em> per sfogliare e selezionare la netlist +desiderata. Poi <em>Leggere</em> la netlist. Ogni modulo non ancora caricato +apparirà, sovrapposto uno sull’altro (vedremo poi come spostarli +automaticamente).</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_board_outline_with_dogpile.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_board_outline_with_dogpile.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se nessuna delle impronte è stata piazzata, tutte le impronte appariranno +sulla scheda nello stesso punto, rendendole difficili da riconoscere. È +possibile disporle automaticamente (usando il comando <em>Disposizione globale</em> +tramite il pulsante destro del mouse). Ecco il risultato di tale +riorganizzazione:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_board_outline_with_globally_placed_modules.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_board_outline_with_globally_placed_modules.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Nota</div> +</td> +<td class="content">Se una scheda viene modificata sostituendo un’impronta esistente con una +nuova (per esempio cambiando una resistenza da 1/8W con una da 1/2W) in +CvPcb, sarà necessario cancellare il componente esistente prima che Pcbnew +carichi l’impronta di rimpiazzo. Comunque, se un’impronta deve essere +sostituita da una esistente, è più facile usare la finestra di dialogo +impronte, accessibile tramite clic sul tasto destro del mouse sopra +l’impronta in questione.</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_correggere_una_scheda">6.2. Correggere una scheda</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>È molto spesso necessario correggere una scheda seguendo un corrispondente +cambiamento nello schema elettrico.</p></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_passi_da_seguire">6.2.1. Passi da seguire</h4> +<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> +<li> +<p> +Creare una nuova dallo schema elettrico modificato. +Se sono stati aggiunti nuovi componenti, collegarli alle impronte +corrispondenti in CvPcb. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Leggere la nuova netlist in Pcbnew. +</p> +</li> +</ol></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_cancellare_le_piste_errate">6.2.2. Cancellare le piste errate</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew è in grado di cancellare automaticamente piste che sono divenute +errate per delle modifiche. Per far ciò, controllare l’opzione <em>Cancella</em> +nel riquadro <em>Piste non collegate</em> nella finestra di dialogo della netlist:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_bad_tracks_deletion_option.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_bad_tracks_deletion_option.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Comunque, si fa spesso più velocemente a modificare tali piste a mano (la +funzione DRC ne permette l’identificazione).</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_componenti_cancellati">6.2.3. Componenti cancellati</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew può cancellare impronte corrispondenti a componenti che sono stati +rimossi dallo schema. Opzionale.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ciò è necessario perché ci sono spesso impronte (fori di fissaggio viti, per +esempio) aggiunte al circuito stampato che non appariranno mai sullo schema +elettrico.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_extra_footprints_deletion_option.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_extra_footprints_deletion_option.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se l’opzione "Impronte extra" è selezionata, un’impronta corrispondente ad +un componente non trovato nella netlist, verrà cancellata, a meno che questa +non abbia l’opzione "Bloccata" attiva. È una buona idea attivare +quest’opzione per le impronte "meccaniche":</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_unlock_footprint_option.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_unlock_footprint_option.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_impronte_modificate">6.2.4. Impronte modificate</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se un’impronta viene modificata nella netlist (usando CvPcb), ma l’impronta +è stata già posizionata, essa non verrà modificata da Pcbnew, a meno che la +corrispondente opzione del riquadro <em>Scambio impronte</em> della finestra di +dialogo netlist dialog sia stata abilitata:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_exchange_module_option.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_exchange_module_option.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Cambiare un’impronta (sostituendo una resistenza con un’altra di dimensione +diversa, per esempio) può essere effettuata direttamente modificando +l’impronta.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_opzioni_avanzate_selezioni_usando_le_marche_temporali">6.2.5. Opzioni avanzate - selezioni usando le marche temporali</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Alle volte la notazione dello schema elettrico viene cambiata, senza che vi +sia cambiamento materiale nel circuito (ciò può riguardare i riferimenti - +come R5, U4…). Il circuito stampato è così inalterato (eccetto forse per +la serigrafia). Ciononostante, internamente, i componenti e le impronte sono +rappresentati dai loro riferimenti. In questo caso, l’opzione <em>Marcatura +temporale</em> della finestra di dialogo della netlist può venire selezionata +prima della ri-lettura della netlist:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_module_selection_option.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_module_selection_option.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Con questa opzione, Pcbnew non identifica più le impronte dai riferimenti, +ma dalle marcature temporali. Le marcature temporali sono automaticamente +generate da Eeschema (è la data e l’ora di quando il componente è stato +inserito nello schema).</p></div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Avvertenza</div> +</td> +<td class="content">È necessario esercitare una grande cura nell’uso di questa opzione (salvare +prima il file!). Questo perché la tecnica è complicata nel caso si usino +componenti contenenti più parti (per es. un 7400 possiede 4 parti e un +contenitore). In questo caso, la marcatura temporale non è definita +univocamente (per il 7400 ce ne sarebbero fino a quattro - una per ogni +parte). Ad ogni modo, l’opzione marcatura temporale solitamente risolve i +problemi di ri-annotazione.</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_scambio_diretto_di_impronte_gia_piazzate_sulla_scheda">6.3. Scambio diretto di impronte già piazzate sulla scheda</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il cambio di un’impronta (o qualche impronte identica) con un’altra impronta +è molto utile e molto facile:</p></div> +<div class="olist arabic"><ol class="arabic"> +<li> +<p> +Clic su un’impronta per aprire la finestra di dialogo della modifica. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Attiva la modifica delle impronte. +</p> +</li> +</ol></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_change_modules_button.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_change_modules_button.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Opzioni per il cambio delle impronte:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_footprint_exchange_options.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_footprint_exchange_options.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Bisogna scegliere un nuovo nome impronta e usare:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Cambia impronta di <em>xx</em></strong> per l’impronta corrente +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Cambia impronte <em>yy</em></strong> per tutte le impronte come l’impronta corrente. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Cambia le impronte con lo stesso valore</strong> per tutte le impronte come l’impronta + corrente, ristretto a componenti aventi lo stesso valore. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Aggiorna tutte le impronte della scheda</strong> per ricaricare tutte le impronte sulla scheda. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_piazzamento_impronte">7. Piazzamento impronte</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_piazzamento_assistito">7.1. Piazzamento assistito</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Durante lo spostamento di impronte la ratsnest delle impronte (la rete di +connessioni) può essere mostrata per assistere durante il piazzamento. Per +abilitare questa funzione deve essere attivata l’icona +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/modratsnest.png" alt="images/icons/modratsnest.png"> +</span> della barra strumenti di sinistra.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_piazzamento_manuale">7.2. Piazzamento manuale</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Selezionare l’impronta con il pulsante destro del mouse e scegliere il +comando Sposta dal menu. Spostare l’impronta sulla posizione richiesta e +piazzarla con il punsante sinistro del mouse. Se richiesto, l’impronta +selezionata può anche essere ruotata, invertita o modificata. Selezionare +Annulla dal menu (o premere il tasto Esc) per annullare il comando.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Qui si può osservare la visualizzazione della ratsnest dell’impronta durante +uno spostamento:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_ratsnest_during_move.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_ratsnest_during_move.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il circuito, una volta che tutte le impronte siano state piazzate, potrebbe +apparire come mostrato:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_circuit_after_placement.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_circuit_after_placement.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_distribuzione_automatica_impronte">7.3. Distribuzione automatica impronte</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In generale, le impronte si possono spostare solo se non sono state +“Bloccate”. Questo attributo può essere acceso o spento dal menu a +discesa (pulsante destro del mouse sopra l’impronta) durante la modalità +impronte o tramite il menu di modifica dell’impronta.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Come dichiarato nello precedente capitolo, le nuove impronte caricate +durante la lettura della netlist appaiono impilate in una singola posizione +sulla scheda. Pcbnew permette la distribuzione automatica delle impronte per +semplificarne la selezione ed il piazzamento manuali.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Selezionare l’opzione “Modalità impronte” (icona + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_module.png" alt="images/icons/mode_module.png"> +</span> sulla barra strumenti in alto). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +La finestra a scomparsa attivata dal pulsante destro del mouse diventa: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se è presente un’impronta sotto il puntatore del mouse:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_context_module_mode_module_under_cursor.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_context_module_mode_module_under_cursor.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se non c'è niente sotto il puntatore:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_context_module_mode_no_module_under_cursor.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_context_module_mode_no_module_under_cursor.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In entrambi i casi i seguenti comandi sono disponibili:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Disponi tutte le impronte</strong> permette la distribuzione automatica di tutte le + impronte non bloccate. In generale viene usato dopo la prima lettura di + una netlist. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Disponi tutte le impronte non già presenti sulla scheda</strong> permette la + distribuzione automatica delle impronte che non sono già state piazzate + all’interno dei contorni dello stampato. Questo comando richiede che sia + già presente un bordo scheda per determinare quali impronte possano + essere distribuite automaticamente. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_disposizione_automatica_di_impronte">7.4. Disposizione automatica di impronte</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_caratteristiche_del_piazzamento_automatico">7.4.1. Caratteristiche del piazzamento automatico</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La funzione di piazzamento automatico permette il piazzamento di impronte +sulle 2 facce di un circuito stampato (anche se lo spostamento di +un’impronta sullo strato rame non è automatico).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Cerca anche il miglior orientamento (0, 90, -90, 180 gradi) per +l’impronta. Il piazzamento viene fatto secondo un algoritmo di +ottimizzazione, che cerca di minimizzare la lunghezza della ratsnest e di +creare spazio tra le impronte più grandi con molti piedini. L’ordine di +piazzamento è ottimizzato per piazzare inizialmente queste impronte più +grandi con molti piedini.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_preparazione">7.4.2. Preparazione</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew può perciò piazzare le impronte automaticamente, anche se è +necessario guidare questo piazzamento, perché nessun software può indovinare +cosa l’utente desidera ottenere.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Prima che un piazzamento automatico venga effettuato si deve:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Creare il contorno della scheda (può essere complesso, ma deve essere chiuso + se la forma non è rettangolare). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Piazzare manualmente i componenti le cui posizioni sono imposte (connettori, + fori di fissaggio, ecc.). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Stesso discorso per alcune impronte SMD e componenti critici (impronte + grandi per esempio) che devono stare su uno specifico lato o in una + specifica posizione sulla scheda e questo va fatto manualmente. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Una volta completati i piazzamenti manuali queste impronte devono essere + “fissate” per prevenirne lo spostamento. Con l’icona della modalità + impronte <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/mode_module.png" alt="images/icons/mode_module.png"> +</span> selezionata fare clic destro + sull’impronta e selezionare "Fissa impronte" nel menu a discesa. Questa + operazione può essere effettuata anche tramite il menu Impronta/Modifica + parametri. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Il piazzamento automatico può essere effettuato. Con l’icona modalità + impronte selezionata, fare clic destro e selezionare Disposizione globale - + e poi Posiziona automaticamente tutte le impronte. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Durante il piazzamento automatico, se richiesto, Pcbnew può ottimizzare +l’orientamento delle impronte. Comunque la rotazione verrà tentata solo se +viene autorizzata per l’impronta (vedere le opzioni dell’editor impronte).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Solitamente le resistenze e i condensatori non polarizzati vengono +autorizzati alla rotazione di 180 gradi. Alcune impronte (i piccoli +transistor per esempio) possono essere autorizzati per la rotazione di +/- +90 e 180 gradi.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per ogni impronta un cursore autorizza la rotazione di 90 gradi e un secondo +cursore autorizza la rotazione di 180 gradi. Un’impostazione di 0 previene +la rotazione, una impostazione di 10 la autorizza, e un valore intermedio +indica una preferenza per/contro la rotazione.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’autorizzazione alla rotazione può essere effettuata modificando l’impronta +una volta che questa viene piazzata sulla scheda. Comunque è preferibile +impostare le opzioni richieste sull’impronta nella libreria dato che queste +impostazioni verranno ereditate ogni volta che l’impronta viene usata.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_auto_piazzamento_interattivo">7.4.3. Auto-piazzamento interattivo</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Potrebbe rendersi necessario il blocco del piazzamento automatico, durante +il suo funzionamento (effettuabile premendo il tasto Esc), e il +riposizionamento manuale di un’impronta. Usando il comando Autoposiziona +prossima impronta si riavvierà l’autopiazzamento dal punto in cui era stato +fermato.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il comando Posiziona automaticamente nuove impronte permette il piazzamento +automatico delle impronte chen non sono state già piazzate all’interno dei +limiti della scheda. Non sposterà comunque quelle dentro i bordi del +circuito stampato anche se queste dovessero non essere “bloccate”.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il comando Posiziona automaticamente rende possibile l’esecuzione di un +autopiazzamento dell’impronta indicata dal mouse, anche se questa dovesse +avere l’attributo di “blocco” attivo.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_nota_aggiuntiva">7.4.4. Nota aggiuntiva</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew determina automaticamente la possibile zona di piazzamento +dell’impronta rispettando la forma dei bordi della scheda, che non devono +necessariamente essere rettangolari (può essere tonda, avere ritagli, ecc.).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se la scheda non è rettangolare, il profilo della scheda deve essere chiuso, +in modo da permettere a Pcbnew di determinare cosa è dentro e cosa è fuori +dalla scheda. Analogamente, se ci sono dei ritagli interni, i loro bordi +devono essere chiusi.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew calcola la possibile zona di piazzamento delle impronte usando i +bordi della scheda, e poi passa ogni impronta una alla volta sopra +quest’area in modo da determinare il posizionamento ottimale.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_setting_routing_parameters">8. Setting routing parameters</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_current_settings">8.1. Current settings</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_accessing_the_main_dialog">8.1.1. Accessing the main dialog</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The most important parameters are accessed from the following drop-down +menu:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_dropdown.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_dropdown.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>and are set in the Design Rules dialog.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_current_settings_2">8.1.2. Current settings</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Current settings are displayed in the top toolbar.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_top_toolbar.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_top_toolbar.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_general_options">8.2. General options</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The General options menu is available via the top toolbar link Preferences +→ General dialog.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_preferences_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_preferences_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The dialog looks like the following:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_general_options_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_general_options_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>For the creation of tracks the necessary parameters are:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Tracks 45 Only</strong>: Directions allowed for track segments are 0, 45 or + 90 degrees. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Double Segm Track</strong>: When creating tracks, 2 segments will be + displayed. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Tracks Auto Del</strong>: When recreating tracks, the old one will be + automatically deleted if considered redundant. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Magnetic Pads</strong>: The graphic cursor becomes a pad, centered in the + pad area. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Magnetic Tracks</strong>: The graphic cursor becomes the track axis. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_netclasses">8.3. Netclasses</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew allows you to define different routing parameters for each +net. Parameters are defined by a group of nets.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +A group of nets is called a Netclass. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +There is always a netclass called "default". +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Users can add other Netclasses. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A netclass specifies:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The width of tracks, via diameters and drills. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The clearance between pads and tracks (or vias). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +When routing, Pcbnew automatically selects the netclass corresponding to the + net of the track to create or edit, and therefore the routing parameters. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_setting_routing_parameters_2">8.3.1. Setting routing parameters</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The choice is made in the menu: Design Rules → Design Rules.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_netclass_editor">8.3.2. Netclass editor</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The Netclass editor allows you to:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Add or delete Netclasses. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Set routing parameters values: clearance, track width, via sizes. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Group nets in netclasses. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_editor_netclass_tab.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_editor_netclass_tab.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_global_design_rules">8.3.3. Global Design Rules</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The global design rules are:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Enabling/disabling Blind/buried Vias use. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Enabling/disabling Micro Vias use. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Minimum Allowed Values for tracks and vias. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A DRC error is raised when a value smaller than the minimum value specified +is encountered. The second dialog panel is:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_editor_global_tab.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_design_rules_editor_global_tab.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This dialog also allows to enter a "stock" of tracks and via sizes.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When routing, one can select one of these values to create a track or via, +instead of using the netclass’s default value.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Useful in critical cases when a small track segment must have a specific +size.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_via_parameters">8.3.4. Via parameters</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew handles 3 types of vias:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Through vias (usual vias). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Blind or buried vias. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Micro Vias, like buried vias but restricted to an external layer to its + nearest neighbor. They are intended to connect BGA pins to the nearest inner + layer. Their diameter is usually very small and they are drilled by laser. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>By default, all vias have the same drill value.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This dialog specifies the smallest acceptable values for via parameters. On +a board, a via smaller than specified here generates a DRC error.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_track_parameters">8.3.5. Track parameters</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Specify the minimum acceptable track width. On a board, a track width +smaller than specified here generates a DRC error.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_specific_sizes">8.3.6. Specific sizes</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_specific_size_options.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_specific_size_options.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>One can enter a set of extra tracks and/or via sizes. While routing a track, +these values can be used on demand instead of the values from the current +netclass values.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_examples_and_typical_dimensions">8.4. Examples and typical dimensions</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_track_width">8.4.1. Track width</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Use the largest possible value and conform to the minimum sizes given here.</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<thead> +<tr> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Units </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 1 </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 2 </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 3 </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 4 </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 5</th> +</tr> +</thead> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">mm</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.8</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.5</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.4</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.25</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.15</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">mils</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">31</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">20</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">16</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">10</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">6</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_insulation_clearance">8.4.2. Insulation (clearance)</h4> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<col style="width:16%;"> +<thead> +<tr> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > Units </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 1 </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 2 </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 3 </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 4 </th> +<th class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" > CLASS 5</th> +</tr> +</thead> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">mm</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.7</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.5</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.35</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.23</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">0.15</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">mils</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">27</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">20</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">14</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">9</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">6</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Usually, the minimum clearance is very similar to the minimum track width.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_examples">8.5. Examples</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_rustic">8.5.1. Rustic</h4> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Clearance: 0.35 mm (0.0138 inches). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Track width: 0.8 mm (0.0315 inches). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Pad diameter for ICs and vias: 1.91 mm (0.0750 inches). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Pad diameter for discrete components: 2.54 mm (0.1 inches). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Ground track width: 2.54 mm (0.1 inches). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_dr_example_rustic.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_dr_example_rustic.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_standard">8.5.2. Standard</h4> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Clearance: 0.35mm (0.0138 inches). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Track width: 0.5mm (0.0127 inches). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Pad diameter for ICs: make them elongated in order to allow tracks to pass + between IC pads and yet have the pads offer a sufficient adhesive surface + (1.27 x 2.54 mm -→ 0.05 x 0.1 inches). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Vias: 1.27 mm (0.0500 inches). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_dr_example_standard.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_dr_example_standard.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_manual_routing">8.6. Manual routing</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Manual routing is often recommended, because it is the only method offering +control over routing priorities. For example, it is preferable to start by +routing power tracks, making them wide and short and keeping analog and +digital supplies well separated. Later, sensitive signal tracks should be +routed. Amongst other problems, automatic routing often requires many +vias. However, automatic routing can offer a useful insight into the +positioning of footprints. With experience, you will probably find that the +automatic router is useful for quickly routing the <em>obvious</em> tracks, but the +remaining tracks will best be routed by hand.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_help_when_creating_tracks">8.7. Help when creating tracks</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew can display the full ratsnest, if the button +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/modratsnest.png" alt="images/icons/modratsnest.png"> +</span> is activated.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The button <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/net_highlight.png" alt="images/icons/net_highlight.png"> +</span> allows one to highlight a +net (click to a pad or an existing track to highlight the corresponding +net).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The DRC checks tracks in real time while creating them. One cannot create a +track which does not match the DRC rules. It is possible to disable the DRC +by clicking on the button. This is, however, not recommended, use it only in +specific cases.</p></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_creating_tracks">8.7.1. Creating tracks</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A track can be created by clicking on the button +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_tracks.png" alt="images/icons/add_tracks.png"> +</span>. A new track must start on a pad or on +another track, because Pcbnew must know the net used for the new track (in +order to match the DRC rules).</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_creating_new_track.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_creating_new_track.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When creating a new track, Pcbnew shows links to nearest unconnected pads, +link number set in option "Max. Links" in General Options.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>End the track by double-clicking, by the pop-up menu or by its hot key.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_in_progres_context.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_in_progres_context.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_moving_and_dragging_tracks">8.7.2. Moving and dragging tracks</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When the button <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_tracks.png" alt="images/icons/add_tracks.png"> +</span> is active, the track +where the cursor is positioned can be moved with the hotkey <em>M</em>. If you +want to drag the track you can use the hotkey <em>G</em>.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_via_insertion">8.7.3. Via Insertion</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A via can be inserted only when a track is in progress:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +By the pop-up menu. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +By the hotkey <em>V</em>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +By switching to a new copper layer using the appropriate hotkey. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_select_edit_the_track_width_and_via_size">8.8. Select/edit the track width and via size</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When clicking on a track or a pad, Pcbnew automatically selects the +corresponding Netclass, and the track size and via dimensions are derived +from this netclass.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>As previously seen, the Global Design Rules editor has a tool to insert +extra tracks and via sizes.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The horizontal toolbar can be used to select a size. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +When the button <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_tracks.png" alt="images/icons/add_tracks.png"> +</span> is active, the current + track width can be selected from the pop-up menu (accessible as well when + creating a track). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The user can utilize the default Netclasses values or a specified value. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_using_the_horizontal_toolbar">8.8.1. Using the horizontal toolbar</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar.png"> +</div> +</div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:40%;"> +<col style="width:60%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_track_width_selection.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_track_width_selection.png" width="70%"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Track width selection. The symbol * is a mark for default Netclass +value selection.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_track_width_selection_in_use.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_track_width_selection_in_use.png" width="70%"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selecting a specific track width value. +The first value in the list is always the netclass value. +Other values are tracks widths entered from the Global Design Rules editor.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_via_size_selection.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_via_size_selection.png" width="70%"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Via size selection. +The symbol * is a mark for default Netclass value selection.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_via_size_selection_in_use.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_via_size_selection_in_use.png" width="70%"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Selecting a specific via dimension value. +The first value in the list is always the netclass value. +Other values are via dimensions entered from the Global Design Rules editor.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/auto_track_width.png" alt="images/icons/auto_track_width.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">When enabled: Automatic track width selection. +When starting a track on an existing track, the new track has the same width as the existing track.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_grid_size_selection.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_grid_size_selection.png" width="70%"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Grid size selection.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_zoom_selection.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_toolbar_zoom_selection.png" width="70%"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Zoom selection.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_using_the_pop_up_menu">8.8.2. Using the pop-up menu</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>One can select a new size for routing, or change to a previously created via +or track segment:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_context_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_context_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If you want to change many via (or track) sizes, the best way is to use a +specific Netclass for the net(s) that must be edited (see global changes).</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_editing_and_changing_tracks">8.9. Editing and changing tracks</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_change_a_track">8.9.1. Change a track</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In many cases redrawing a track is required.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>New track (in progress):</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_new_track_in_progress.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_new_track_in_progress.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When finished:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_new_track_completed.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_new_track_completed.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew will automatically remove the old track if it is redundant.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_global_changes">8.9.2. Global changes</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Global tracks and via sizes dialog editor is accessible via the pop-up +window by right clicking on a track:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_global_edit_context_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_global_edit_context_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The dialog editor allows global changes of tracks and/or vias for:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The current net. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The whole board. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_track_global_edit_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_track_global_edit_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_sbroglio_interattivo">9. Sbroglio Interattivo</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Lo sbroglio interattivo permette di sbrogliare in maniera veloce ed +efficiente i circuiti stampati, spingendo e girando attorno agli elementi +sulla scheda che potrebbero collidere con le piste che si sta disegnando.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Sono supportate le seguenti modalità:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Evidenzia collisioni</strong>, che evidenzia con un colore verde brillante + tutti gli oggetti e le regioni che violano le regole di isolamento. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Spingi</strong>, tenta di spingere e compattare tutti gli elementi che collidono + con la pista che si sta attualmente sbrogliando. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Aggira</strong>, tenta di evitare gli ostacoli circondandoli/girandoci + attorno. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_impostazione">9.1. Impostazione</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Prima di usare lo sbroglio interattivo, impostare queste due cose:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Impostazioni isolamento</strong>. Per configurare le impostazioni di isolamento, + aprire la finestra di dialogo delle <em>Regole di progettazione</em> e assicurarsi + che i valori di isolamento predefiniti siano almeno ragionevoli. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/it/rules_editor.png" alt="Rules editor"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Abilita la modalità OpenGL</strong>, selezionando l’opzione di menu + <em>Visualizza→Imposta schermo a OpenGL</em> o premendo <strong>F11</strong>. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/it/opengl_menu.png" alt="OpenGL mode"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_disposizione_delle_piste">9.2. Disposizione delle piste</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per attivare lo strumento di sbroglio premere il pulsante <em>Sbroglio +interattivo</em> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/route_icon.png" alt="Interactive Router Button"> +</span> o il +pulsante <strong>X</strong>. Il puntatore si trasformerà in una croce e il nome dello +strumento apparirà nella barra di stato.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per cominciare a tracciare una pista, fare clic su un qualsiasi elemento +(una piazzola, una pista o un via) o premere nuovamente il tasto <strong>X</strong> con il +puntatore del mouse sopra l’elemento. La nuova pista userà il collegamento +(net) dell’elemento di partenza. Facendo clic o premento <strong>X</strong> su una zona +vuota del circuito stampato farà cominciare una pista senza un collegamento +assegnato.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Spostare il mouse per definire la forma della pista. Lo sbrogliatore proverà +a seguire il mouse, scartando gli ostacoli inamovibili (come le piazzole) e +spostando piste/via in rotta di collisione, a seconda della modalità in cui +si trova. Ritirando il puntatore del mouse, gli elementi spostati torneranno +alle loro posizioni iniziali.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Facendo clic su una piazzola/pista/via dello stesso collegamento (net) +finisce lo sbroglio. Facendo clic in uno spazio vuoto fissa i segmenti +sbrogliati fino a quel momento e continua lo sbroglio della pista.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per bloccare lo sbroglio e annullare tutti i cambiamenti (elementi spostati, +ecc.), basta premere il tasto <strong>Esc</strong>.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Premendo <strong>V</strong> o selezionando <em>Piazza via passante</em> dal menu contestuale +durante lo sbroglio di una pista, si collega un via in cima alla pista che +si sta sbrogliando. Premendo <strong>V</strong> ulteriormente si disabilita l’inserimento +del via. Facendo clic in qualsiasi punto del circuito stampato, si piazza il +via e lo sbroglio continua.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Premendo <strong>/</strong> o selezionando <em>commuta postura pista</em> dal menu contestuale +commuta la direzione del segmento di pista iniziale tra diritto e diagonale.</p></div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Nota</div> +</td> +<td class="content">Come valore predefinito, lo sbroglio si aggancia automaticamente al centro o +agli assi degli elementi. Questo magnetismo può essere disabilitato tenendo +premuto il tasto <strong>Maiusc</strong> durante lo sbroglio o la selezione degli elementi.</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_impostazione_larghezze_piste_e_dimensioni_via">9.3. Impostazione larghezze piste e dimensioni via</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ci sono diversi metodi per pre-selezionare la larghezza pista/dimensione via +o per cambiarle durante lo sbroglio:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Usare le scorciatoie da tastiera standard. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Premere <strong>W</strong> o selezionare <em>Dimensione pista personalizzata</em> dal menu + contestuale per battere un valore personalizzato di spessore + pista/dimensione via. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Selezionare una larghezza predefinita dal sotto-menu <em>Seleziona larghezza + pista</em> del menu contestuale. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Selezionare <em>Usa la larghezza iniziale pista</em> nel menu <em>Seleziona larghezza + pista</em> per prelevare la larghezza dall’elemento iniziale (o le piste già + connesse ad esso). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_trascinamento">9.4. Trascinamento</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Lo sbrogliatore può trascinare segmenti di pista, angoli e via. Per +trascinare un elemento, fare clic su di esso con il tasto <strong>Ctrl</strong> premuto, +posizionare il puntatore del mouse sopra di esso e premere il <strong>G</strong> o +selezionare <em>Trascina pista/via</em> dal menu contestuale. Concludere +trascinando e facendo clic nuovamente o interrompere premendo il tasto +<em>Esc</em>.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_opzioni">9.5. Opzioni</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il comportamento dello sbrogliatore può essere configurato premento il tasto +<em>E</em> o selezionando <em>Opzioni di sbroglio</em> dal menu contestuale mentre si sta +nella modalità Pista. Si aprirà una finestra come questa riportata in basso:</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le opzioni sono:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/it/router_options.png" alt="Router options window screenshot"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Modo</strong> - seleziona come lo sbroglio gestisce la violazione delle regole di progettazione (DRC) (spingendo, girando attorno, ecc.) +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Spingi via</strong> - se disabilitato, i via vengono trattati come oggetti inamovibili e circondati anziché spostati. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Salta sopra gli ostacoli</strong> - se abilitata, lo sbrogliatore prova a spostare le piste collidenti dietro gli ostacoli pieni (come le piazzole) invece di "riflettere" indietro la collisione +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Elimina piste ridondanti</strong> - elimina gli anelli durante lo sbroglio (cioè se la nuova pista garantisce la stessa connettività di una già esistente, la vecchia pista viene rimossa). La rimozione degli anelli funziona localmente (solo tra l’inizio e la fine della pista in fase di sbroglio). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Restringimento automatico</strong> - se abilitata, lo sbrogliatore prova a connettere + piazzole/via in modo pulito, evitando angoli acuti e piste di connessione seghettate. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Arrotonda segmenti seghettati</strong> - se abilitata, lo sbrogliatore cerca di fondere + assieme diversi segmenti seghettati in uno singolo e dritto (modalità trascinamento). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Permetti violazioni DRC</strong> (solo modalità <em>evidenzia collisioni</em>) - permette + di stendere una pista anche se sta violando le regole di progettazione. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Sforzo di ottimizzazione</strong> - definisce quanto tempo lo sbroglio dovrà impiegare nell’ottimizzazione della disposizione/spostamento di piste. Un valore maggiore significa uno sbroglio più pulito (ma più lento), mentre valori più bassi portano a sbrogli più veloci ma con tracce più seghettate. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_creazione_di_zone_in_rame">10. Creazione di zone in rame</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le zone rame sono definite da un contorno (poligono chiuso), e possono +includere fori (poligoni chiusi dentro il contorno). Una zone può essere +disegnata su uno strato rame o in alternativa su uno strato tecnico.</p></div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_creazione_zone_su_strati_rame">10.1. Creazione zone su strati rame</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le connessioni piazzola (e pista) verso aree rame piene vengono controllate +dal motore di controllo regole elettriche. Una zona deve essere piena (non +basta solo crearla) per essere connessa a delle piazzole. Pcbnew attualmente +usa segmenti di pista o poligoni per riempire le aree rame.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ogni opzione ha i suoi vantaggi e svantaggi; il principale svantaggio +consiste nel tempo di ridisegno dello schermo che aumenta sensibilmente +sulle macchine lente. Il risultato finale è comunque lo stesso.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per risparmiare tempo di elaborazione, lo riempimento delle zone non viene +rifatto ad ogni cambiamento, ma solo:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Se viene eseguito un comando di riempimento area. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Quando viene effettuato un controllo regole elettriche. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le zone rame devono essere riempite o ri-riempite dopo avere effettuati dei +cambiamenti nelle piste o nelle piazzole. Le zone rame (normalmente i piani +di massa e di alimentazione) sono di solito connessi ad un collegamento +(net).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per creare una zona rame si deve:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Selezionare i parametri (nome collegamento, strato…). Abilitare lo strato + ed evidenziare il collegamento non è necessario ma è buona pratica. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Creare il limite della zona (altrimenti, la scheda intera viene riempita). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Riempire la zona. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew prova a riempire tutte le zone in un colpo, e normalmente, non ci +saranno blocchi di rame sconnessi. Può succedere che delle aree rimangano +non riempite. Le zone che non hanno collegamenti non vengono pulite e +possono avere delle aree isolate.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_creazione_di_una_zona">10.2. Creazione di una zona</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_creazione_dei_limiti_di_una_zona">10.2.1. Creazione dei limiti di una zona</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Usare lo strumento <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_zone.png" alt="images/icons/add_zone.png"> +</span>. Lo strato attivo deve +essere uno strato rame. Facendo clic per iniziare a delineare la zona, la +seguente finestra di dialogo verrà aperta.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_properties_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_properties_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Si puo specificare tutti i parametri per questa zona:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Collegamento +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Strato +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Opzioni riempimenti +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Opzioni piazzole +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Livello priorità +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Disegnare il bordo della zona su questo strato. Questo bordo è un poligono, +creato facendo clic su ogni angolo. Un doppio clic finirà e chiuderà il +poligono. Se il punto di inizio e il punto di fine non sono alle stesse +coordinate, Pcbnew aggiungerà un segmento dal punto finale a quello +iniziale.</p></div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Nota</div> +</td> +<td class="content"> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Il controllo regole elettriche è attivo durante la creazione dei bordi delle + zone. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Uno spigolo che crea un errore DRC non viene accettato da Pcbnew. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Nell’immagine seguente si può vedere un esempio di bordo zona (il poligono +tratteggiato con linea sottile):</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_limit_example.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_limit_example.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_livello_priorita">10.2.2. Livello priorità</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Alle volte una piccola zona deve essere creata all’interno di una più +grande.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ciò è possibile se la piccola zona ha un più alto livello di priorità di +quella più grande.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Impostazioni livello:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_priority_level_setting.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_priority_level_setting.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ecco un esempio:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_priority_example.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_priority_example.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Dopo lo riempimento:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_priority_example_after_filling.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_priority_example_after_filling.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_riempimento_della_zona">10.2.3. Riempimento della zona</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Durante lo riempimento di una zona, Pcbnew rimuove tutte le isole di rame +non connesse. Per accedere al comando di riempimento zone, fare clic desto +sulla zona bordo.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_context_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_context_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Attivare il comando “Riempi zona”. Di seguito il risultato del riempimento +con il punto di inizio dentro il poligono:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_filling_result.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_filling_result.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il poligono è il bordo dell’area di riempimento. Si può osservare un’area +non riempita dentro la zona, perché quest’area non è accessibile:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Una pista crea un confine, e +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Non c'è punto di inizio per riempire quest’area. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Nota</div> +</td> +<td class="content">Si possono usare molti poligoni per creare aree di ritaglio. Qui si può +osservare un esempio:</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_filled_with_cutout.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_filled_with_cutout.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_opzioni_riempimenti">10.3. Opzioni riempimenti</h3> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_filling_options.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_filling_options.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Quando si riempie un’area, si deve scegliere:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +La modalità di riempimento. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +L’isolamento e lo spessore minimo del rame. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Come le piazzole sono disegnate dentro la zona (o connesse alla zona). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +I parametri delle piazzole termiche. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_modalita_di_riempimento">10.3.1. Modalità di riempimento</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le zone possono essere riempite usando poligoni o segmenti. Il risultato è +lo stesso. Se si hanno problemi con la modalità poligoni (rifresco dello +schermo lento) usare i segmenti.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_isolamento_e_spessore_minimo_del_rame">10.3.2. Isolamento e spessore minimo del rame</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Una buona scelta per l’isolamento è una griglia un po' più grande della +griglia di sbroglio. Il valore di spessore minimo di rame assicura che non +ci saranno aree di rame troppo piccole.</p></div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Avvertenza</div> +</td> +<td class="content">se questo valore è troppo ampio, forme piccole come i raggi dei supporti +termici non possono essere disegnati.</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_opzioni_piazzole">10.3.3. Opzioni piazzole</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le piazzole del collegamento possono essere incluse o escluse dalla zona, o +connesse tramite supporti termici.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Se incluse, saldare e dissaldare può essere molto difficile a causa della + grande massa termica della grande area in rame. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_include_pads.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_include_pads.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Se escluse, la connessione alla zona non sarà molto buona. +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +La zona può essere riempita solo se esistono piste di connessione delle aree della zona. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Le piazzole devono essere connesse da piste. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_exclude_pads.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_exclude_pads.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Un supporto termico è un buon compromesso. +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +La piazzola è connessa da 4 segmenti di pista. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +La larghezza del segmento è il valore corrente usato per la larghezza della pista. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_thermal_relief.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_thermal_relief.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_parametri_dei_supporti_termici">10.3.4. Parametri dei supporti termici</h4> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_thermal_relief_settings.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_thermal_relief_settings.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Si può impostare due parametri per i supporti termici:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_thermal_relief_parameters.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_thermal_relief_parameters.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_scelta_dei_parametri">10.3.5. Scelta dei parametri</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il valore di larghezza del rame per i supporti termici deve essere maggiore +del valore di larghezza minimo per la zona di rame. Altrimenti, non possono +essere disegnati.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Inoltre, un valore troppo grande per questo parametro o per la dimensione +dell’antipiazzola non permette di creare un supporto termico per piazzole +piccole (come le dimensioni di piazzola usate per i componenti SMD).</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_aggiunta_di_un_8217_area_di_ritaglio_dentro_una_zona">10.4. Aggiunta di un’area di ritaglio dentro una zona</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La zona deve già esistere. Per aggiungere un’area di ritaglio (un’area non +riempita dentro la zona):</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Fare clic-destro sul profilo esistente. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Selezionare «Aggiungi area di ritaglio». +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_add_cutout_menu_item.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_add_cutout_menu_item.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Creazione di un nuovo contorno. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_unfilled_cutout_outline.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_unfilled_cutout_outline.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_modifica_dei_contorni">10.5. Modifica dei contorni</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Un contorno può essere modificato da:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Spostamento di un angolo o di uno spigolo. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Cancellazione o aggiunta di un angolo. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Aggiunta di un’area simile o di un’area di ritaglio. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se i poligoni si sovrappongono, verranno combinati.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_modification_menu_items.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_modification_menu_items.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per fare ciò, fare clic-destro su un angolo o su un bordo e poi selezionare +il comando appropriato.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ecco un angolo (da un ritaglio) che è stato spostato:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_corner_move_during.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_corner_move_during.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ecco il risultato finale:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_corner_move_after.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_corner_move_after.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>I poligoni sono combinati.</p></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_aggiungere_una_zona_simile">10.5.1. Aggiungere una zona simile</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Aggiungere una zona simile:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_add_similar_during.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_add_similar_during.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Risultato finale:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_zone_add_similar_after.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_zone_add_similar_after.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_modifica_dei_parametri_di_zona">10.6. Modifica dei parametri di zona</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Quando si fa clic-destro su un contorno, e si usa “Modifica parametri di +zona” si aprirà la finestra di dialogo dei parametri della zona con la +quale si potrà inserire i parametri iniziali. Se la zona è già riempita, +sarà necessario ri-riempirla.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_riempimento_finale_della_zona">10.7. Riempimento finale della zona</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Quando la scheda è finita, è necessario riempire o ri-riempire tutte le +zone. Per fare ciò:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Attivare lo strumento zone tramite il pulsante + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_zone.png" alt="images/icons/add_zone.png"> +</span>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Fare clic-destro per mostrare il menu a scomparsa. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Usare Riempi o Ri-riempi tutte le zone: + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_fill_refill_all_zones.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_fill_refill_all_zones.png"> +</span> +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Avvertenza</div> +</td> +<td class="content">Il calcolo può impiegare del tempo se la griglia di riempimento è piccola.</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_cambiare_i_nomi_delle_zone">10.8. Cambiare i nomi delle zone</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Dopo la modifica dello schema elettrico, è possibile cambiare il nome di +ogni collegamento. Per esempio VCC può essere cambiato in +5V.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Quando un controllo regole elettriche globale viene eseguito, Pcbnew +verifica se esiste il nome collegamento della zona, e mostra un errore ne +non esistono.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Modificando manualmente i parametri di zona, sarà necessario cambiare il +vecchio nome nel nuovo.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_creazione_di_zone_sugli_strati_tecnici">10.9. Creazione di zone sugli strati tecnici</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_creazione_dei_limiti_di_zona">10.9.1. Creazione dei limiti di zona</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This is done using the button <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_zone.png" alt="images/icons/add_zone.png"> +</span>. The active +layer must be a technical layer.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When clicking to start the zone outline, this dialog box is opened:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_technical_layer_zone_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_technical_layer_zone_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Select the technical layer to place the zone and draw the zone outline like +explained previously for copper layers.</p></div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Nota</div> +</td> +<td class="content"> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +For editing outlines use the same method as for copper zones. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +If necessary, cutout areas can be added. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_creazione_di_un_8217_area_proibita">10.10. Creazione di un’area proibita</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Select the tool <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_keepout_area.png" alt="images/icons/add_keepout_area.png"> +</span></p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Lo strato attivo dovrebbe essere uno strato rame.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>After clicking on the starting point of a new keepout area, the dialog box +is opened:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_keepout_area_properties.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_keepout_area_properties.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>One can select disallowed items:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Piste. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Via. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Copper pours. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When a track or a via is inside a keepout which does not allow it, a DRC +error will be raised.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per le zone in rame, l’area dentro un’area proibita senza diffusione di rame +non verrà riempita. Un’area proibita è come una zona, perciò la modifica dei +suoi bordi è analoga alla modifica di una zone in rame.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_files_for_circuit_fabrication">11. Files for circuit fabrication</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Let us see now what the steps are for the creation of the necessary files +for the production of your printed circuit board.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>All files generated by KiCad are placed in the working directory which is +the same directory that contains the xxxx.brd file for the printed circuit +board.</p></div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_final_preparations">11.1. Final preparations</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The generation of the necessary files for the production of your printed +circuit board includes the following preparatory steps.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Mark any layer (e.g., <em>top or front</em> and <em>bottom or back</em>) with the project + name by placing appropriate text upon each of the layers. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +All text on copper layers (sometimes called <em>solder</em> or <em>bottom</em>) must be + mirrored. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Create any ground planes, modifying traces as required to ensure they are + contiguous. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Place alignment crosshairs and possibly the dimensions of the board outline + (these are usually placed on one of the general purpose layers). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Here is an example showing all of these elements, except ground planes, +which have been omitted for better visibility:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_final_preparation_example_board.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_final_preparation_example_board.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A color key for the 4 copper layers has also been included: +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_layer_colour_key.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_layer_colour_key.png"> +</span></p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_final_drc_test">11.2. Final DRC test</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Before generating the output files, a global DRC test is very strongly +recommended.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Zones are filled or refilled when starting a DRC. Press the button +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/drc.png" alt="images/icons/drc.png"> +</span> to launch the following DRC dialog:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_DRC_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_DRC_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Adjust the parameters accordingly and then press the "Start DRC" button.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This final check will prevent any unpleasant surprises.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_setting_coordinates_origin">11.3. Setting coordinates origin</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Set the coordinates origin for the photo plot and drill files, one must +place the auxiliary axis on this origin. Activate the icon +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/pcb_offset.png" alt="images/icons/pcb_offset.png"> +</span>. Move the auxiliary axis by +left-clicking on the chosen location.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_setting_pcb_origin.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_setting_pcb_origin.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_generating_files_for_photo_tracing">11.4. Generating files for photo-tracing</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This is done via the Files/Plot menu option and invokes the following +dialog:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_plot_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_plot_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Usually, the files are in the GERBER format. Nevertheless, it is possible to +produce output in both HPGL and POSTSCRIPT formats. When Postscript format +is selected, this dialog will appear.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_plot_postscript_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_plot_postscript_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In these formats, a fine scale adjust can be used to compensate for the +plotter accuracy and to have a true scale of 1 for the output:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_plot_fine_scale_setting.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_plot_fine_scale_setting.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_gerber_format">11.4.1. GERBER format</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>For each layer, Pcbnew generates a separate file following the GERBER 274X +standard, by default in 4.6 format (each coordinate in the file is +represented by 10 digits, of which 4 are before the decimal point and 6 +follow it), units in inches, and a scale of 1.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>It is normally necessary to create files for all of the copper layers and, +depending on the circuit, for the silkscreen, solder mask, and solder paste +layers. All of these files can be produced in one step, by selecting the +appropriate check boxes.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>For example, for a double-sided circuit with silkscreen, solder mask and +solder paste (for SMD components), 8 files should be generated (<em>xxxx</em> +represents the name of the .brd file).</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +xxxx-F_Cu.gbr for the component side. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +xxxx-B_Cu.gbr for the copper side. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +xxxx-F_SilkS.gbr for the component-side silkscreen markings. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +xxxx-B_SilkS.gbr for the copper-side silkscreen markings. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +xxxx-F_Paste.gbr for the component-side solder paste. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +xxxx-B_Paste.gbr for the copper-side solder paste. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +xxxx-F_Mask.gbr for the component-side solder mask. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +xxxx-B_Mask.gbr for the copper-side solder mask. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>GERBER file format:</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The format used by Pcbnew is RS274X format 4.6, Imperial, Leading zero +omitted, Abs format. These are very usual settings.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_postscript_format">11.4.2. POSTSCRIPT format</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The standard extension for the output files is .ps in the case of postscript +output. As for HPGL output, the tracing can be at user-selected scales and +can be mirrored. If the Org = Centre option is active, the origin for the +coordinates of the tracing table is assumed to be in the centre of the +drawing.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If the Print Sheet Ref option is active, the sheet cartridge is traced.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_plot_options">11.4.3. Plot options</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Gerber format:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_plot_options_gerber.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_plot_options_gerber.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Altri formati:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_plot_options_other_formats.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_plot_options_other_formats.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>GERBER format specific options:</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<col style="width:50%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Use Protel filename extensions</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Use .gbl .gtl .gbs .gts .gbp .gtp .gbo .gto instead of .gbr for file name extensions.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Include extended attributes</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Output extended attributes to file.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Subtract soldermask from silkscreen</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Remove all Silk from solder paste areas.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_other_formats">11.4.4. Other formats</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The standard extension depends on the output file type.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Some options are not available for some formats.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The plot can be done at user-selected scales and can be mirrored.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The Print Drill Opt list offers the option of pads that are filled, drilled +to the correct diameter or drilled with a small hole (to guide hand +drilling).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If the Print Sheet Ref option is active, the sheet cartridge is traced.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_global_clearance_settings_for_the_solder_stop_and_the_solder_paste_mask">11.5. Global clearance settings for the solder stop and the solder paste mask</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Mask clearance values can be set globally for the solder mask layers and the +solder paste layers. These clearances can be set at the following levels.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +At pads level. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +At footprint level. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Globally. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>And Pcbnew uses by priority order.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pad values. If null: +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Footprint values. If null: +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Global values. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_access">11.5.1. Access</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The menu option for this is available via the Dimensions menu:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_pad_mask_clearance_menu_item.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_pad_mask_clearance_menu_item.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The dialog box is the following:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_pad_mask_settings_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_pad_mask_settings_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_solder_mask_clearance">11.5.2. Solder mask clearance</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A value near to 0.2 mm is usually good. This value is positive because the +mask is usually bigger than the pad.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>One can set a minimum value for the solder mask width, between 2 pads.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If the actual value is smaller than the minimum value, the 2 solder mask +shapes will be merged.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_solder_paste_clearance">11.5.3. Solder paste clearance</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The final clearance is the sum of the solder paste clearance and a +percentage of the pad size.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This value is negative because the mask is usually smaller than the pad.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_generating_drill_files">11.6. Generating drill files</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The creation of a drill file xxxx.drl following the EXCELLON standard is +always necessary.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>One can also produce an optional drill report, and an optional drill map.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The drill map can be plotted using several formats. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The drill report is a plain text file. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The generation of these files is controlled via:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +"Create Drill File" button, or +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Files/Fabrication Outputs/Drill file menu selection. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The Drill tools dialog box will be the following:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_drill_file_dialog.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_drill_file_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>For setting the coordinate origin, the following dialog box is used:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_drill_origin_setting.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_drill_origin_setting.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Absolute: absolute coordinate system is used. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Auxiliary axis: coordinates are relative to the auxiliary axis, use the icon + (right toolbar) to set it. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_generating_wiring_documentation">11.7. Generating wiring documentation</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>To produce wiring documentation files, the component and copper silkscreen +layers can be traced. Usually, just the component-side silkscreen markings +are sufficient for wiring a PCB. If the copper-side silkscreen is used, the +text it contains should be mirrored in order to be readable.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_generation_of_files_for_automatic_component_insertion">11.8. Generation of files for automatic component insertion</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This option is accessed via the Postprocess/Create Cmp file menu +option. However, no file will be generated unless at least one footprint has +the Normal+Insert attribute activated (see Editing Footprints). One or two +files will be produced, depending upon whether insertable components are +present on one or both sides of the PCB. A dialogue box will display the +names of the file(s) created.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_advanced_tracing_options">11.9. Advanced tracing options</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The options described below (part of the Files/Plot dialogue) allow for +fine-grained control of the tracing process. They are particularly useful +when printing the silkscreen markings for wiring documentation.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_advanced_tracing_options.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_advanced_tracing_options.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The available options are:</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:33%;"> +<col style="width:66%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Plot sheet reference on all layers</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Trace sheet outline and the cartridge.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Plot pads on silkscreen</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Enables/disables printing of pad outlines on the silkscreen layers (if the pads +have already been declared to appear on these layers). Prevents any pads from +being printed in the disabled mode.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Plot footprint values</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Enables printing of VALUE text on the silkscreen.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Plot footprint references</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Enables printing of the REFERENCE text on the silkscreen.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Force plotting of invisible values/references</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Forces printing of fields (reference, value) declared as invisible. +In combination with <em>Plot footprint values</em> and <em>Plot footprint references</em>, +this option enables production of documents for guiding wiring and repair. +These options have proven necessary for circuits using components that are too +small (SMD) to allow readable placement of two separate text fields.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Do not tent vias</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Delete the mask over the vias.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Exclude PCB edge layer from other layers</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">GERBER format specific. Do not plot graphic items on edge layer.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Use Protel filename extensions</p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">GERBER format specific. +When creating files, use specific extensions for each file. +If disabled the Gerber file extension is .gbr.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_editor_impronte_gestione_librerie">12. Editor impronte - Gestione librerie</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_panoramica_dell_8217_editor_delle_impronte">12.1. Panoramica dell’editor delle impronte</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew può mantenere simultaneamente diverse librerie. Perciò, quando +un’impronta viene caricata, tutte le librerie che appaiono nell’elenco +librerie vengono scansionate fino al ritrovamento della prima istanza di +impronta. Di seguito, si noti che la libreria attiva è la libreria +selezionata all’interno dell’editor delle impronte, il programma verrà +descritto</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’editor impronte consente la creazione e la modifica di impronte:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Aggiunta e rimozione piazzole. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Il cambiamento delle proprietà delle piazzole (forma, strato) per piazzole + individuali o globalmente per tutte le piazzole di un’impronta. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Modifica di elementi grafici (linee, testo). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Modifica dei campi di informazione (valore, riferimento, ecc.). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Modifica della documentazione associata (descrizione, parole chiave). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’editor impronte consente la manutenzione della libreria attiva permettendo +di:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Elencare le impronte nella liberia attiva. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Cancellare una impronta dalla libreria attiva. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Salvare una impronta nella libreria attiva. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Salvare tutte le impronte contenute in un circuito stampato. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>È possibile anche creare nuove librerie.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’estensione della libreria è <span class="monospaced">.mod</span>.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_accedere_all_8217_editor_delle_impronte">12.2. Accedere all’editor delle impronte</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Si può accedere all’editor impronte in due modi differenti:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Direttamente, tramite l’icona <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/module_editor.png" alt="images/icons/module_editor.png"> +</span> nella + barra strumentu principale di Pcbnew. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Nella finestra di dialogo di modifica dell’impronta attiva (vedere figura in + basso: accesso ottenuto tramite il menu contestuale), c'è il pulsante + Modifica con l’editor delle impronte. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_module_properties.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_module_properties.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>In questo caso, l’impronta attiva della scheda verrà caricata +automaticamente nell’editor delle impronte, abilitandone la modifica +immediata o l’archiviazione.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_interfaccia_utente_dell_8217_editor_delle_impronte">12.3. Interfaccia utente dell’editor delle impronte</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Chiamando l’editor delle impronte apparirà la seguente finestra:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_main_window.png" alt="images/Modedit_main_window.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_barra_strumenti_principale_nell_8217_editor_delle_impronte">12.4. Barra strumenti principale nell’editor delle impronte</h3> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_top_toolbar.png" alt="images/Modedit_top_toolbar.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Da questa barra strumenti, sono disponibili le seguenti funzioni:</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:80%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/library.png" alt="images/icons/library.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Seleziona la libreria attiva.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/save_library.png" alt="images/icons/save_library.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Salva l’impronta corrente nella libreria attiva, e la scrive su disco.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/new_library.png" alt="images/icons/new_library.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Crea una nuova libreria e vi salva l’impronta corrente.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/modview_icon.png" alt="images/icons/modview_icon.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Apre il visualizzatore impronte.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/delete.png" alt="images/icons/delete.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Accede alla finestra di dialogo di cancellazione impronta dalla libreria attiva.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/new_footprint.png" alt="images/icons/new_footprint.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Crea una nuova impronta.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/module_wizard.png" alt="images/icons/module_wizard.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Crea un’impronta con una procedura guidata.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/load_module_lib.png" alt="images/icons/load_module_lib.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Carica un’impronta dalla libreria attiva.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/load_module_board.png" alt="images/icons/load_module_board.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Carica (importa) un’impronta dal circuito stampato.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/update_module_board.png" alt="images/icons/update_module_board.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Esporta l’impronta corrente sul circuito stampato se l’impronta +era stata in precedenza importata dalla scheda corrente. Rimpiazzerà +la corrispondente impronta sulla scheda (cioè, rispettando posizione e +orientamento).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/insert_module_board.png" alt="images/icons/insert_module_board.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Esporta l’impronta corrente sul circuito stampato. Verrà +copiata sul circuito stampato alla posizione 0.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/import_module.png" alt="images/icons/import_module.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Importa un’impronta da un file creato dal comando Esporta.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/export_module.png" alt="images/icons/export_module.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Esporta un’impronta. Questo comando è essenzialmente identico a quello +per creare una libreria, l’unica differenza è che crea una libreria +nella cartella utente, mentre crea una libreria nella cartella +delle librerie standard (solitamente kicad/modules).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/undo.png" alt="images/icons/undo.png"> +</span> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/redo.png" alt="images/icons/redo.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Annulla e Ripeti.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/module_options.png" alt="images/icons/module_options.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Invoca la finestra di dialogo delle proprietà dell’impronta.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/print_button.png" alt="images/icons/print_button.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Chiama la finestra di dialogo della stampa.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/zoom_in.png" alt="images/icons/zoom_in.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/zoom_out.png" alt="images/icons/zoom_out.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/zoom_redraw.png" alt="images/icons/zoom_redraw.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/zoom_fit_in_page.png" alt="images/icons/zoom_fit_in_page.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Comandi standard dello zoom.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/options_pad.png" alt="images/icons/options_pad.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Chiama l’editor della piazzola.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/module_check.png" alt="images/icons/module_check.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Esegue un controllo di correttezza dell’impronta.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_creazione_di_una_nuova_libreria">12.5. Creazione di una nuova libreria</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La creazione di una nuova libreria viene fatta tramite il pulsante +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/new_library.png" alt="images/icons/new_library.png"> +</span>, e il file viene creato come +impostazione predefinita nella cartella delle librerie o tramite il pulsante +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/export_module.png" alt="images/icons/export_module.png"> +</span>, nel qual caso il file viene creato +come impostazione predefinita nella propria cartella di lavoro.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Una finestra di dialogo di selezione file permette di specificare il nome +della libreria e di cambiarne la sua cartella. In entrambi i casi, la +libreria conterrà l’impronta da modificare.</p></div> +<div class="admonitionblock"> +<table><tr> +<td class="icon"> +<div class="title">Avvertenza</div> +</td> +<td class="content">Se dovesse esistere una vecchia libreria con lo stesso nome, questa verrà +sovrascritta senza avvertimenti.</td> +</tr></table> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_salvataggio_di_una_impronta_nella_libreria_attiva">12.6. Salvataggio di una impronta nella libreria attiva</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’azione di salvataggio di una impronta (modificando in tal modo il file +della libreria attiva) viene eseguita usando questo pulsante +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/save_library.png" alt="images/icons/save_library.png"> +</span>. Se una impronta dello stesso nome +esiste già, questa verrà rimpiazzata. Dato che si dipenderà dall’accuratezza +delle librerie di impronte, è importante ricontrollare l’impronta prima di +salvare.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>È raccomandata la modifica dei campi di riferimento o del valore al nome +dell’impronta come identificata nella libreria.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_trasferimento_di_una_impronta_da_una_libreria_ad_un_8217_altra">12.7. Trasferimento di una impronta da una libreria ad un’altra</h3> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Selezionare la libreria sorgente tramite il pulsante + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/library.png" alt="images/icons/library.png"> +</span>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Caricare l’impronta tramite il pulsante + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/load_module_lib.png" alt="images/icons/load_module_lib.png"> +</span>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Selezionare la libreria di destinazione tramite il pulsante + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/library.png" alt="images/icons/library.png"> +</span>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Salvare l’impronta tramite il pulsante + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/save_library.png" alt="images/icons/save_library.png"> +</span>. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Si puo voler anche eliminare l’impronta sorgente.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Riselezionare la libreria sorgente con <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/library.png" alt="images/icons/library.png"> +</span>. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Eliminare la vecchia impronta tramite il pulsante + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/delete.png" alt="images/icons/delete.png"> +</span>. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_salvataggio_di_tutte_le_impronte_sulla_scheda_nella_libreria_attiva">12.8. Salvataggio di tutte le impronte sulla scheda nella libreria attiva</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>È possibile copiare tutte le impronte di un dato progetto di scheda sulla +libreria attiva. Queste impronte manterranno i loro nomi correnti nella +libreria. Questo comando ha due usi:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Per creare un archivio o una libreria completa con le impronte di una + scheda, nel caso che si perda una libreria. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Ancora più importante, per facilitare la manutenzione della libreria + consentendo la produzione di documentazione per la libreria, come sotto. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_documentazione_per_le_impronte_di_libreria">12.9. Documentazione per le impronte di libreria</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>È caldamente raccomandato di documentare le impronte che si creano, in modo +da abilitarne la ricerca rapida e senza errori.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per esempio, chi è in grado di ricordare tutte le possibili varianti della +piedinatura di un contenitore TO92? La finestra di dialogo delle proprietà +dell’impronta offre una semplice soluzione a questo problema.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_module_properties.png" alt="images/Modedit_module_properties.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Questa finestra di dialogo accetta:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Una riga di descrizione/commento. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Più parole chiave. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La descrizione viene visualizzata con l’elenco componenti in Cvpcb e, in +Pcbnew, viene usata dalla finestra di dialogo di selezione delle impronte.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le parole chiave permettono di restringere le ricerche a impronte a cui +queste parole chiave corrispondono.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Quando si carica direttamente una impronta (l’icona +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/module.png" alt="images/icons/module.png"> +</span> Pcbnew della barra strumenti a destra), +possono essere inserite delle parole chiave nella finestra di +dialogo. Quindi, inserendo il testo <span class="monospaced">=CONN</span> si provocherà la visualizzazione +dell’elenco delle impronte il cui elenco parole chiave contiene la parola +<span class="monospaced">CONN</span>.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_librerie_di_documentazione_pratica_raccomandata">12.10. Librerie di documentazione - pratica raccomandata</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Si raccomanda di creare le librerie indirettamente, creando uno o più schede +circuiti ausiliarie che costituiranno la sorgente (di parte) della libreria, +come segue: creare una scheda in formato A4, in modo da essere in grado di +stamparla facilmente in scala (1:1).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Creare le impronte che la libreria conterrà in questo circuito stampato. La +libreria stessa verrà creata con il comando File/Archivia impronte/Crea +libreria e archivia impronte.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_archive_footprints_menu.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_archive_footprints_menu.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La "vera sorgente" della libreria sarà perciò la scheda di circuito stampato +ausiliaria, e sarà su questa scheda che ogni successiva alterazione di +impronte verrà fatta. Naturalmente, diverse schede possono venir salvate +nella stessa libreria.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>È generalmente una buona idea creare diverse librerie per diversi tipi di +componenti (connettori, componenti discreti,…), dato che Pcbnew è in grado +di effetturare ricerche su più librerie durante il caricamento delle +impronte.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ecco un esempio di tale sorgente di libreria:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_example_library.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_example_library.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Questa tecnica ha diversi vantaggi:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Il circuito può essere stampato in scala e servire come documentazione per + la libreria senza alcuno sforzo. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Futuri cambiamenti di Pcbnew possono richiedere la rigenerazione delle + librerie, cosa che può essere effettuata molto velocemente se sono stati + usati sorgenti di circuito stampato di questo tipo. Tutto ciò è importante, + dato che i formati dei file di circuito stampato vengono garantiti rimanere + compatibili nei futuri sviluppi, ma ciò non è detto avvenga anche per quanto + riguarda il formato dei file delle librerie. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_gestione_librerie_di_impronte">12.11. Gestione librerie di impronte</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’elenco delle librerie di impronte in Pcbnew può essere modificato usando +il manager delle librerie di impronte. Ciò permette di aggiungere e +rimuovere librerie di impronte a mano, e permette anche di invocare +l’assistente di librerie di impronte premendo il pulsante "Accoda con +l’assistente".</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’assistente librerie di impronte può essere invocato anche tramite il menu +delle preferenze, e può automaticamente aggiungere una libreria (rilevandone +il tipo) da un file o da un URL Github. L’URL delle librerie ufficiali è: +<a href="https://github.com/KiCad">https://github.com/KiCad</a> .</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Ulteriori dettagli sulle tabelle di librerie di impronte, sul manager e +sull’assistente relativo, sono reperibili sul manuale di riferimento del +programma CvPcb nella sezione <em>Tabelle librerie impronte</em>.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_gestione_librerie_forme_3d">12.12. Gestione librerie forme 3D</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le librerie di forme 3D possono essere scaricate con l’apposito assistente +per le librerie di forme 3D. Esso può essere invocato dal menu delle +preferenze → Scaricatore librerie di forme 3D.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_editor_delle_impronte_creazione_e_modifica_delle_impronte">13. Editor delle impronte - Creazione e modifica delle impronte</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_panoramica_dell_8217_editor_delle_impronte_2">13.1. Panoramica dell’editor delle impronte</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’editor delle impronte viene usato per la modifica e per la creazione di +impronte di componenti per il circuito stampato. Ciò include:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Aggiunta e rimozione piazzole. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Cambio delle proprietà delle piazzole (forma, strato), per piazzole + individuali o per tutte le piazzole in un’impronta. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Aggiunta e modifica di elementi grafici (contorni, testo). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Modifica dei campi (valore, riferimento, ecc.). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Modifica della documentazione associata (descrizione, parole chiave). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_elementi_impronte">13.2. Elementi impronte</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Un’impronta è la rappresentazione fisica (impronta) della parte da inserire +nel circuito stampato e deve essere collegata ai corrisponendi componenti +presenti nello schema elettrico. Ogni impronta include tre elementi diversi:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Le piazzole. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Contorni grafici e testo. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Campi. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Inoltre, altri parametri dovranno essere definiti correttamente se si +desidera usare la funzione di auto piazzamento. Stesso dicasi per la +generazione di file di auto inserimento.</p></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_piazzole">13.2.1. Piazzole</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Due proprietà delle piazzole sono importanti:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Geometria (forma, strati, fori). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Il numero piazzola può essere lungo fino a quattro caratteri alfanumerici. I + seguenti sono quindi tutti numeri piazzola validi: 1, 45 e 9999, ma anche + AA56 e ANOD. Il numero piazzola deve essere identico al numero piedino + corrispondente nello schema elettrico, dato che definisce la corrispondenza + piedino - numero piazzola che Pcbnew usa per metterli in collegamento. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_contorni">13.2.2. Contorni</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>I contorni grafici vengono usati per disegnare la forma fisica +dell’impronta. Sono disponibili diversi tipi di contorni: linee, cerchi, +archi e testo. I contorni non hanno significato elettrico, sono +semplicemente elementi grafici di aiuto.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_campi">13.2.3. Campi</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Questi sono elementi di testo associati ad una impronta. Due sono +obbligatori e sempre presenti: il campo riferimento e il campo +valore. Questi vengono automaticamente letti ed aggiornati da Pcbnew quando +viene letta una netlist durante il caricamento delle impronte nella +scheda. Il riferimento viene rimpiazzato dall’appropriato riferimento dello +schema elettrico (U1, IC3, ecc.). Il valore viene anch’esso rimpiazzato +dall’appropriato valore della parte corrispondente nello schema elettrico +(47K, 74LS02, ecc.). Altri campi possono venire aggiunti ma si comporteranno +come testo grafico.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_avvio_dell_8217_editor_delle_impronte_e_selezione_di_una_impronta_da_modificare">13.3. Avvio dell’editor delle impronte e selezione di una impronta da modificare</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>L’editor delle impronte può essere avviato in due modi:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Direttamente tramite l’icona <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/module_editor.png" alt="images/icons/module_editor.png"> +</span> dalla + barra strumenti principale di Pcbnew. Questo permette la creazione o la + modifica di un’impronta nella libreria. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Facendo doppio clic su un’impronta verrà lanciato il menu “Proprietà + impronta”, che offre un pulsante “Editor impronte”. Se si esegue + quest’azione, l’impronta presente nella scheda verrà caricata nell’editor, + per la modifica o per il suo salvataggio. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_barre_strumenti_editor_impronte">13.4. Barre strumenti editor impronte</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La chiamata dell’editor delle impronte porterà in primo piano una finestra +simile alla seguente:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_main_window.png" alt="images/Modedit_main_window.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_barra_strumenti_modifica_lato_destro">13.4.1. Barra strumenti modifica (lato destro)</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Questa barra contiene strumenti per:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Posizionare piazzole. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Aggiungere elementi grafici (contorni, testo). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Posizionare ancoraggi. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Eliminare elementi. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Le funzioni specifiche sono le seguenti:</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:80%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/cursor.png" alt="images/icons/cursor.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Nessuno strumento.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/pad.png" alt="images/icons/pad.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Aggiungi piazzole.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_polygon.png" alt="images/icons/add_polygon.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Disegna segmenti di linea e poligoni.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_circle.png" alt="images/icons/add_circle.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Disegna cerchi.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_arc.png" alt="images/icons/add_arc.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Disegna archi circolari.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/add_text.png" alt="images/icons/add_text.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Aggiungi testo grafico (i campi non sono gestiti da questo strumento).</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/anchor.png" alt="images/icons/anchor.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Posiziona il punto di ancoraggio dell’impronta.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/delete.png" alt="images/icons/delete.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Cancella elementi.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/grid_select_axis.png" alt="images/icons/grid_select_axis.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Origine della griglia (spostamento griglia). Utile per il posizionamento delle piazzole. +L’origine della griglia può essere inserita su una data posizione (la prima piazzola da piazzare), +ed in seguito la dimensione della griglia può essere impostata al "passo integrato". +In questo modo il piazzamento di piazzole viene molto facilitato.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_mostra_la_barra_strumenti_sulla_sinistra">13.4.2. Mostra la barra strumenti (sulla sinistra)</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Questi strumenti gestiscono le opzioni di visualizzazione nell’editor delle +impronte:</p></div> +<table class="tableblock frame-all grid-all" +style=" +width:100%; +"> +<col style="width:20%;"> +<col style="width:80%;"> +<tbody> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/grid.png" alt="images/icons/grid.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Mostra la griglia.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/polar_coord.png" alt="images/icons/polar_coord.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Mostra le coordinate polari.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/unit_mm.png" alt="images/icons/unit_mm.png"> +</span> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/unit_inch.png" alt="images/icons/unit_inch.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Unità in uso in mm o pollici</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/cursor_shape.png" alt="images/icons/cursor_shape.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Commuta forma del puntatore.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/pad_sketch.png" alt="images/icons/pad_sketch.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Visualizza piazzole in modalità contorno.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/text_sketch.png" alt="images/icons/text_sketch.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Visualizza testo in modalità contorno.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/show_mod_edge.png" alt="images/icons/show_mod_edge.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Visualizza bordi in modalità contorno.</p></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock"><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/contrast_mode.png" alt="images/icons/contrast_mode.png"> +</span></p></td> +<td class="tableblock halign-left valign-top" ><p class="tableblock">Visualizza con contrasto aumentato.</p></td> +</tr> +</tbody> +</table> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_menu_contestuali">13.5. Menu contestuali</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il pulsante destro del mouse richiama dei menu che dipendono dall’elemento +sottostante il puntatore.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il menu contestuale per la modifica dei parametri dell’impronta:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_context_menu_module_parameters.png" alt="images/Modedit_context_menu_module_parameters.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il menu contestuale per la modifica delle piazzole:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_context_menu_pads.png" alt="images/Modedit_context_menu_pads.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il menu contestuale per la modifica degli elementi grafici:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_context_menu_graphics.png" alt="images/Modedit_context_menu_graphics.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_la_finestra_di_dialogo_delle_proprieta_dell_8217_impronta">13.6. La finestra di dialogo delle proprietà dell’impronta</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Questa finestra di dialogo può essere avviata quando il puntatore è sopra +un’impronta facendo clic con il tasto destro del mouse e selezionando +“Modifica impronta”.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_module_properties_dialog.png" alt="images/Modedit_module_properties_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Questa finestra di dialogo può essere usata per definire i principali +parametri dell’impronta.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_creazione_di_una_nuova_impronta">13.7. Creazione di una nuova impronta</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Una nuova impronta può essere creata tramite il pulsante +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/new_footprint.png" alt="images/icons/new_footprint.png"> +</span>. Il nome della nuova impronta verrà +richiesto. Questo sarà il nome con il quale l’impronta verrà identificata +nella libreria.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Questo testo serve anche come valore dell’impronta, il quale viene +sostanzialmente rimpiazzato dal valore reale (100 µF_16 V, 100 Ω_0.5 W, +…).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>La nuova impronta richiederà:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Contorni (e forse del testo grafico). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Piazzole. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Un valore (testo nascosto che viene rimpiazzato dal vero valore se usato). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Un metodo alternativo:</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Se una nuova impronta è simile ad una esistente in una libreria o su una +scheda, un metodo alternativo e più veloce per creare una nuova impronta è +il seguente:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Caricare l’impronta simile (<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/load_module_lib.png" alt="images/icons/load_module_lib.png"> +</span>, + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/load_module_board.png" alt="images/icons/load_module_board.png"> +</span> o + <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/import_module.png" alt="images/icons/import_module.png"> +</span>). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Modificare il campo "Nome impronta in libreria" in modo da generare un nuovo + identificatore (nome). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Modificare e salvare la nuova impronta. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_aggiunta_e_modifica_piazzole">13.8. Aggiunta e modifica piazzole</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Una volta creata l’impronta, si possono aggiungere le piazzole, cancellarle +o modificarle. La modifica delle piazzole può essere locale, e riguardare +solo la piazzola sottostante il puntatore, o globale, e coinvolgere tutte le +piazzole dell’impronta.</p></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_aggiunta_piazzole">13.8.1. Aggiunta piazzole</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Selezionare l’icona <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/pad.png" alt="images/icons/pad.png"> +</span> dalla barra strumenti a +destra. Le piazzolo possono essere aggiunte facendo clic sulla posizione +desiderata con il pulsante sinistro del mouse. Le proprietà delle piazzole +sono predefinite nel menu delle proprietà della piazzola.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Non dimentirare di inserire il numero della piazzola.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_impostazioni_proprieta_piazzole">13.8.2. Impostazioni proprietà piazzole</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Si può fare in tre modi diversi:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Selezionando l’icona <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/options_pad.png" alt="images/icons/options_pad.png"> +</span> dalla barra + strumenti orizzontale. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Facendo clic su una piazzola esistente e selezionando "Modifica + piazzola". Poi, le impostazioni della piazzola, possono si possono + modificare. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Facendo clic su una piazzola esistente e selezionando "Esporta impostazioni + piazzola". In questo caso, le proprietà geometriche della piazzola + selezionata diverranno le impostazioni piazzola predefinite. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Nei primi due casi, la seguente finestra di dialogo verrà mostrata:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_pad_properties_dialog.png" alt="images/Modedit_pad_properties_dialog.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Occorre prestare attenzione a definire correttamente gli strati a cui +apparterrà la piazzola. In particolare, anche se i livelli di rame sono +facili da definire, la gestione di strati non-rame (maschera di saldatura, +piazzole di saldatura …) è altrettanto importante per la fabbricazione del +circuito e la documentazione.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Il selettore del tipo di piazzola provoca una selezione automatica di strati +che generalmente è sufficiente.</p></div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_piazzole_rettangolari">Piazzole rettangolari</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Per impronte SMD di tipo VQFP / PQFP che hanno piazzole rettangolari su +tutti i quattro lati (sia orizzontali che verticali), si raccomanda di usare +una sola forma (ad esempio, un rettangolo orizzontale) e posizionarla con +diversi orientamenti (0 per orizzontale e 90 gradi per verticale). Il +ridimensionamento globale di piazzole può quindi essere realizzato in +un’unica operazione.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_ruota_piazzole">Ruota piazzole</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Rotazioni di -90 o -180 sono richieste solo per le piazzole trapezoidali +usate nelle impronte per microonde.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_piazzole_passanti_non_metallizzate">Piazzole passanti non metallizzate</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pads can be defined as Non-Plated Through Hole pads (NPTH pads).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>These pads must be defined on one or all copper layers (obviously, the hole +exists on all copper layers).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This requirement allows you to define specific clearance parameters ( for +instance clearance for a screw).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>When the pad hole size is the same as the pad size, for a round or oval pad, +this pad is NOT plotted on copper layers in GERBER files.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>These pads are used for mechanical purposes, therefore no pad name or net +name is allowed. A connection to a net is not possible.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_pads_not_on_copper_layers">Pads not on copper layers</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>These are unusual pads. This option can be used to create fiducials or masks +on technical layers.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_offset_parameter">Offset parameter</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pad 3 has an offset Y = 15 mils:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_pad_offset_example.png" alt="images/Modedit_pad_offset_example.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_delta_parameter_trapezoidal_pads">Delta Parameter (trapezoidal pads)</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pad 1 has its parameter Delta X = 10 mils</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_pad_delta_example.png" alt="images/Modedit_pad_delta_example.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_setting_clearance_for_solder_mask_and_solder_paste_mask_layers">13.8.3. Setting clearance for solder mask and solder paste mask layers</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Setting a clearance can be made at 3 levels:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Global level. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Footprint level. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Pad level. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew uses the following to calculate clearances:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Pad settings. If null, +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Footprint settings. If null, +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Global settings. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_remarks">Remarks</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The solder mask pad shape is usually bigger than the pad itself. So the +clearance value is positive. The solder paste mask pad shape is usually +smaller than the pad itself. So the clearance value is negative.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_solder_paste_mask_parameters">Solder paste mask parameters</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>For solder paste mask there are two parameters:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +A fixed value. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +A percentage of the pad size. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The real value is the sum of these two values.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Footprint level settings:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_footprint_level_pad_settings.png" alt="images/Modedit_footprint_level_pad_settings.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pad level settings:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_pad_level_pad_settings.png" alt="images/Modedit_pad_level_pad_settings.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_fields_properties">13.9. Fields Properties</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>There are at least two fields: reference and value.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Their parameters (attribute, size, width) must be updated. You can access +the dialog box from the pop-up menu, by double clicking on the field, or by +the footprint properties dialog box:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_footprint_text_properties.png" alt="images/Modedit_footprint_text_properties.png"> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_automatic_placement_of_a_footprint">13.10. Automatic placement of a footprint</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If the user wishes to exploit the full capabilities of the auto-placement +functions, it is necessary to define the allowed orientations of the +footprint (Footprint Properties dialog).</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_module_autoplace_settings.png" alt="images/Modedit_module_autoplace_settings.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Usually, rotation of 180 degrees is permitted for resistors, non-polarized +capacitors and other symmetrical elements.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Some footprints (small transistors, for example) are often permitted to +rotate by +/- 90 or 180 degrees. By default, a new footprint will have its +rotation permissions set to zero. This can be adjusted according to the +following rule:</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A value of 0 makes rotation impossible, 10 allows it completely, and any +intermediate value represents a limited rotation. For example, a resistor +might have a permission of 10 to rotate 180 degrees (unrestrained) and a +permission of 5 for a +/- 90 degree rotation (allowed, but discouraged).</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_attributes">13.11. Attributes</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The attributes window is the following:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_module_attributes.png" alt="images/Modedit_module_attributes.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +Normal is the standard attribute. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Normal+Insert indicates that the footprint must appear in the automatic + insertion file (for automatic insertion machines). This attribute is most + useful for surface mount components (SMDs). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Virtual indicates that a component is directly formed by the circuit + board. Examples would be edge connectors or inductors created by a + particular track shape (as sometimes seen in microwave footprints). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_documenting_footprints_in_a_library">13.12. Documenting footprints in a library</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>It is strongly recommended to document newly created footprints, in order to +facilitate their rapid and accurate retrieval. Who is able to recall the +multiple pin-out variants of a TO92 footprint?</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The Footprint Properties dialog offers a simple and yet powerful means for +documentation generation.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_module_properties_documentation_fields.png" alt="images/Modedit_module_properties_documentation_fields.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>This menu allows:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The entry of a comment line (description). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +Più parole chiave. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The comment line is displayed with the component list in CvPcb and in the +footprint selection menus in Pcbnew. The keywords can be used to restrict +searches to those parts possessing the given keywords.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Thus, while using the load footprint command (icon in the right-hand toolbar +in Pcbnew), it is possible to type the text <span class="monospaced">=TO220</span> into the dialog box to +have Pcbnew display a list of the footprints possessing the keyword <span class="monospaced">TO220</span></p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_3_dimensional_visualisation">13.13. 3-dimensional visualisation</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>A footprint may have been associated with a file containing a +three-dimensional representation of itself. In order to associate such a +file with a footprint, select the 3D Settings tab. The options panel is the +following:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_module_3d_options.png" alt="images/Modedit_module_3d_options.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The data information should be provided:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +The file containing the 3D representation (created by the 3D modeler + Wings3D, in vrml format, via the export to vrml command). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The default path is kicad/modules/package3d. In the example, the file name + is discret/to_220horiz.wrl, using the default path) +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The x, y and z scales. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The offset with respect to the anchor point of the footprint (usually zero). +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +The initial rotation in degrees about each axis (usually zero). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Setting scale allows:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +To use the same 3D file for footprints which have similar shapes but + different sizes (resistors, capacitors, SMD components…) +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +For small (or very large) packages, a better use of the Wings3D grid is to + scale <strong>0.1 inch in Pcbnew = 1 grid unit</strong> in Wings3D. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If such a file has been specified, it is possible to view the component in +3D.</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Modedit_footprint_3d_preview.png" alt="images/Modedit_footprint_3d_preview.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The 3D model will automatically appear in the 3D representation of the +printed circuit board.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_saving_a_footprint_into_the_active_library">13.14. Saving a footprint into the active library</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The save command (modification of the file of the active library) is +activated by the <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/save_library.png" alt="images/icons/save_library.png"> +</span> button.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If a footprint of the same name exists (an older version), it will be +overwritten. Because it is important to be able to have confidence in the +library footprints, it is worth double-checking the footprint for errors +before saving.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Before saving, it is also recommended to change the reference or value of +the footprint to be equal to the library name of the footprint.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_saving_a_footprint_to_the_board">13.15. Saving a footprint to the board</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If the edited footprint comes from the current board, the button +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/update_module_board.png" alt="images/icons/update_module_board.png"> +</span> will update this footprint on +the board.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_advanced_pcb_editing_tools">14. Advanced PCB editing tools</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="paragraph"><p>There are some more advanced editing tools available in Pcbnew and Footprint +Editor, which can help you to efficiently lay out components on the canvas.</p></div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_duplicating_items">14.1. Duplicating items</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Duplication is a method to clone an item and pick it up in the same +action. It is broadly similar to copy-and-pasting, but it allows you to +"sprinkle" components over the PCB and it allows you to manually lay out +components using the "Move Exact" tool (see below) more easily.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Duplication is done by using the hotkey (which defaults to Ctrl-D) or the +duplicate item option in the context menu. In the legacy renderer, these +appear as below, depending on the item type:</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/duplicate_pad.png" alt="images/icons/duplicate_pad.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/duplicate_line.png" alt="images/icons/duplicate_line.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/duplicate_text.png" alt="images/icons/duplicate_text.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/duplicate_module.png" alt="images/icons/duplicate_module.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/duplicate_target.png" alt="images/icons/duplicate_target.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/duplicate_zone.png" alt="images/icons/duplicate_zone.png"> +</span></p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_moving_items_exactly">14.2. Moving items exactly</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The "Move Exact" tool allows you to move an item (or group of items) by a +certain amount, which can be entered in Cartesian or polar formats and which +can be entered in any supported units. This is useful when it would +otherwise be cumbersome to switch to a different grid, or when a feature is +not spaced according to any existing grids.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>To use this tool, select the items you wish to move and then use either the +hotkey (defaults to Ctrl-M) or the context menu items to invoke the +dialog. You can also invoke the dialog with the hotkey when moving or +duplicating items, which can make it easy to repeatedly apply an offset to +multiple components.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Move exact with Cartesian move vector entry</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_move_exact_cartesian.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_move_exact_cartesian.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Move exact with polar move vector entry</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_move_exact_polar.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_move_exact_polar.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The checkbox allows you to switch between Cartesian and polar co-ordinate +systems. Whatever is currently in the form will be converted automatically +to the other system.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Then you enter the desired move vector. You can use the units indicated by +the labels ("mm" in the images above) or you can specify the units yourself +(e.g. "1 in" for an inch, or "2 rad" for 2 radians).</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pressing OK will apply the translation to the selection, and cancel will +close the dialog and the items will not be moved. If OK is pressed, the move +vector will be saved and pre-filled next time the dialog is opened, which +allows repeated application of the same vector to multiple objects.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_array_tools">14.3. Array tools</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Pcbnew and the Footprint Editor both have assistants for creating arrays of +features and components, which can be used to easily and accurately lay out +repetitive elements on PCBs and in footprints.</p></div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_activating_the_array_tool">14.3.1. Activating the array tool</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The array tool acts on the component under the cursor, or, in GAL mode, on a +selection. It can be accessed either via the context menu for the selection +or by a keyboard shortcut (defaults to Ctrl-N). In legacy mode, the context +menu icons indicate an array of the selected type:</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p><span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/array_pad.png" alt="images/icons/array_pad.png"> +</span> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/array_line.png" alt="images/icons/array_line.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/array_text.png" alt="images/icons/array_text.png"> +</span> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/array_module.png" alt="images/icons/array_module.png"> +</span> +<span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/array_target.png" alt="images/icons/array_target.png"> +</span> <span class="image"> +<img src="images/icons/array_zone.png" alt="images/icons/array_zone.png"> +</span></p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The array tool is presented as a dialog window, with a pane for the types of +arrays. There are two types of arrays supported so far: grid, and circular.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Each type of array can be fully specified on the respective panes. +Geometric options (how the grid is laid out) go on the left; numbering +options (including how the numbers progress across the grid) on the right.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_grid_arrays">14.3.2. Grid arrays</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Grid arrays are arrays that lay components out according to a 2-dimensional +square grid. This kind of array can also produce a linear array by only +laying out a single row or column.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The settings dialog for grid arrays look like this:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_array_dialog_grid.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_array_dialog_grid.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_geometric_options">Geometric options</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The geometric options are as follow:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Horrizontal count</strong>: the number of "columns" in the grid. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Vertical count</strong>: the number of "rows" in the grid. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Horizontal spacing</strong>: the horizontal distance from item to the item in the same row + and next column. If this is negative, the grid progresses from right to left. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Vertical spacing</strong>: the vertical distance from one item to the item in the same + column and the next row. If this is negative, the grid progress bottom to + top. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Horizontal offset</strong>: start each row this distance to the right of the previous + one +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Vertical offset</strong>: start each column this distance below the previous one +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_array_grid_offsets.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_array_grid_offsets.png"> +</div> +<div class="title">Figura 1. 3x3 grid with x and y offsets</div> +</div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Stagger</strong>: add an offset to every set of "n" rows/columns, with each row + progressing by 1/n’th of the relevant spacing dimension: +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_array_grid_stagger_rows_2.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_array_grid_stagger_rows_2.png"> +</div> +<div class="title">Figura 2. 3x3 grid with a row stagger of 2</div> +</div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_array_grid_stagger_cols_3.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_array_grid_stagger_cols_3.png"> +</div> +<div class="title">Figura 3. 4x3 grid with a column stagger of 3</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_numbering_options">Numbering options</h5> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Numbering Direction</strong>: Determines whether numbers proceed along rows and then + moves to the next row, or down columns and then to the next column. Note that + the direction on numbering is defined by the sign of the spacing: a negative + spacing will result in right-to-left or bottom-to-top numbering. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Reverse numbering on alternate rows or columns</strong>: If selected, the numbering order + (left-to-right or right-to-left, for example) on alternate rows or columns. + Whether rows or columns alternate depends on the numbering direction. This + option is useful for packages like DIPs where the numbering proceeds up one + side and down the other. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Restart numbering</strong>: if laying out using items that already have numbers, + reset to the start, otherwise continue if possible from this item’s number +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Numbering Scheme</strong> +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Continuous</strong>: the numbering just continues across a row/column break - if + the last item in the first row is numbered "7", the first item in the second + row will be "8". +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Coordinate</strong>: the numbering uses a two-axis scheme where the + number is made up of the row and column index. Which one comes first + (row or column) is determined by the numbering direction. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Axis numberings</strong>: what "alphabet" to use to number the axes. Choices are +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Numerals</strong> for normal integer indices +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Hexadecimal</strong> for base-16 indexing +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Alphabetic, minus IOSQXZ</strong>, a common scheme for electronic components, + recommended by ASME Y14.35M-1997 sec. 5.2 (previously MIL-STD-100 sec. 406.5) + to avoid confusion with numerals. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Full alphabet</strong> from A-Z. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_circular_arrays">14.3.3. Circular arrays</h4> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Circular arrays lay out items around a circle or a circular arc. The circle +is defined by the location of the selection (or the centre of a selected +group) and a centre point that is specified. Below is the circular array +configuration dialog:</p></div> +<div class="imageblock"> +<div class="content"> +<img src="images/Pcbnew_array_dialog_circular.png" alt="images/Pcbnew_array_dialog_circular.png"> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_geometric_options_2">Geometric options</h5> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Horizontal center</strong>, <strong>Vertical center</strong>: The centre of the circle. The radius + field below will update automatically when you adjust these. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Angle</strong>: The angular difference between two adjacent items in the + array. Set this to zero to evenly divide the circle with "count" elements. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Count</strong>: Number of items in the array (including the original item) +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Rotate</strong>: Rotate each item around its own location. Otherwise, the + item will be translated but not rotated (for example, a square pad + will always remain upright if this option is not set). +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect4"> +<h5 id="_numbering_options_2">Numbering options</h5> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Circular arrays have only one dimension and a simpler geometry than +grids. The meanings of the available options are the same as for grids. +Items are numbered clockwise - for an anticlockwise array, specify a +negative angle.</p></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect1"> +<h2 id="_manuale_di_riferimento_scripting_di_kicad">15. Manuale di riferimento scripting di KiCad</h2> +<div class="sectionbody"> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Lo scripting permette di automatizzare delle operazioni in KiCad usando il +linguaggio <a href="https://www.python.org/">Python</a>.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Also see the doxygen documentation on +<a href="http://ci.kicad-pcb.org/job/kicad-doxygen/ws/build/pcbnew/doxygen-python/html/index.html">Python +Scripting Reference</a>.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>You can see python module help by typing <span class="monospaced">pydoc pcbnew</span> on your terminal.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Using scripting you can create:</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Plugins</strong>: this type of script is loaded when KiCad starts. Examples: +</p> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Footprint Wizards</strong>: To help you build footprints easily filling in parameters. See the dedicated section <a href="#Footprint_Wizards">Footprint Wizards</a> below. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>File I/O</strong> <em>(planned)</em>: To let you write plugins to export/import other filetypes +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Actions</strong> <em>(planned)</em>: Associate events to scripting actions or register new menus or toolbar icons. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>Command Line Scripts</strong>: scripts that can be used from the command line, load boards or libraries, modify them, and render outputs or new boards. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>It shall be noted that the only KiCad applicaiton that supports scripting is +Pcbnew. It is also planned for Eeschema in the future.</p></div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_kicad_objects">15.1. KiCad Objects</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The scripting API reflects the internal object structure inside +KiCad/pcbnew. BOARD is the main object, that has a set of properties and a +set of MODULEs, and TRACKs/VIAs, TEXTE_PCB, DIMENSION, DRAWSEGMENT. Then +MODULEs have D_PADs, EDGEs, etc.</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +See the BOARD section below. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_basic_api_reference">15.2. Basic API Reference</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>All the pcbnew API is provided from the "pcbnew" module in Python. +GetBoard() method will return the current pcb open at editor, useful for +commands written from the integrated scripting shell inside pcbnew or action +plugins.</p></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_loading_and_saving_a_board">15.3. Loading and Saving a Board</h3> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>LoadBoard(filename):</strong> + loads a board from file returning a BOARD object, using the file format that matches the filename extension. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>SaveBoard(filename,board):</strong> + saves a BOARD object to file, using the file format that matches the filename extension. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>board.Save(filename):</strong> + same as above, but it’s a method of BOARD object. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="listingblock"> +<div class="title">Example that loads a board, hides all values, shows all references</div> +<div class="content"><!-- Generator: GNU source-highlight 3.1.7 +by Lorenzo Bettini +http://www.lorenzobettini.it +http://www.gnu.org/software/src-highlite --> +<pre><tt><span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900">#!/usr/bin/env python2.7</span></span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> sys +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">from</span></span> pcbnew <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> <span style="color: #990000">*</span> + +filename<span style="color: #990000">=</span>sys<span style="color: #990000">.</span>argv<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #993399">1</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + +pcb <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">LoadBoard</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>filename<span style="color: #990000">)</span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">for</span></span> module <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">in</span></span> pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetModules</span></span><span style="color: #990000">():</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"* Module: %s"</span><span style="color: #990000">%</span>module<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetReference</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + module<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Value</span></span><span style="color: #990000">().</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetVisible</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>False<span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># set Value as Hidden</span></span> + module<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Reference</span></span><span style="color: #990000">().</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetVisible</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>True<span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># set Reference as Visible</span></span> + +pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Save</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"mod_"</span><span style="color: #990000">+</span>filename<span style="color: #990000">)</span></tt></pre></div></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_listing_and_loading_libraries">15.4. Listing and Loading Libraries</h3> +<div class="listingblock"> +<div class="title">Enumerate library, enumerate modules, enumerate pads</div> +<div class="content"><!-- Generator: GNU source-highlight 3.1.7 +by Lorenzo Bettini +http://www.lorenzobettini.it +http://www.gnu.org/software/src-highlite --> +<pre><tt><span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900">#!/usr/bin/python</span></span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">from</span></span> pcbnew <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> <span style="color: #990000">*</span> + +libpath <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"/usr/share/kicad/modules/Sockets.pretty"</span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">">> enumerate footprints, pads of"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span>libpath + +<span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># Load the suitable plugin to read/write the .pretty library</span></span> +<span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># (containing the .kicad_mod footprint files)</span></span> +src_type <span style="color: #990000">=</span> IO_MGR<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GuessPluginTypeFromLibPath</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> libpath <span style="color: #990000">);</span> +<span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># Rem: we can force the plugin type by using IO_MGR.PluginFind( IO_MGR.KICAD )</span></span> +plugin <span style="color: #990000">=</span> IO_MGR<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">PluginFind</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> src_type <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + +<span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># Print plugin type name: (Expecting "KiCad" for a .pretty library)</span></span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Selected plugin type: %s"</span> <span style="color: #990000">%</span> plugin<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">PluginName</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + +list_of_footprints <span style="color: #990000">=</span> plugin<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">FootprintEnumerate</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>libpath<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">for</span></span> name <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">in</span></span> list_of_footprints<span style="color: #990000">:</span> + fp <span style="color: #990000">=</span> plugin<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">FootprintLoad</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>libpath<span style="color: #990000">,</span>name<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># print the short name of the footprint</span></span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> name <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># this is the name inside the loaded library</span></span> + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># followed by ref field, value field, and decription string:</span></span> + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># Remember ref and value texts are dummy texts, replaced by the schematic values</span></span> + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># when reading a netlist.</span></span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">" ->"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> fp<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetReference</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(),</span> fp<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetValue</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(),</span> fp<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetDescription</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># print pad info: GetPos0() is the pad position relative to the footrint position</span></span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">for</span></span> pad <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">in</span></span> fp<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Pads</span></span><span style="color: #990000">():</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">" pad [%s]"</span> <span style="color: #990000">%</span> pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetPadName</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(),</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"at"</span><span style="color: #990000">,\</span> + <span style="color: #FF0000">"pos0"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToMM</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetPos0</span></span><span style="color: #990000">().</span>x<span style="color: #990000">),</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToMM</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetPos0</span></span><span style="color: #990000">().</span>y<span style="color: #990000">),</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"mm"</span><span style="color: #990000">,\</span> + <span style="color: #FF0000">"shape offset"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToMM</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetOffset</span></span><span style="color: #990000">().</span>x<span style="color: #990000">),</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToMM</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetOffset</span></span><span style="color: #990000">().</span>y<span style="color: #990000">),</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"mm"</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">""</span></tt></pre></div></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_board">15.5. BOARD</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>Board is the basic object in KiCad pcbnew, it’s the document.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>BOARD contains a set of object lists that can be accessed using the +following methods, they will return iterable lists that can be iterated +using "for obj in list:"</p></div> +<div class="ulist"><ul> +<li> +<p> +<strong>board.GetModules():</strong> This method returns a list of MODULE objects, all the modules available in the board will be exposed here. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>board.GetDrawings():</strong> Returns the list of BOARD_ITEMS that belong to the board drawings +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>board.GetTracks():</strong> This method returns a list of TRACKs and VIAs inside a BOARD +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>board.GetFullRatsnest():</strong> Returns the list of ratsnest (connections still not routed) +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>board.GetNetClasses():</strong> Returns the list of net classes +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>board.GetCurrentNetClassName():</strong> Returns the current net class +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>board.GetViasDimensionsList():</strong> Returns the list of Via dimensions available to the board. +</p> +</li> +<li> +<p> +<strong>board.GetTrackWidthList():</strong> Returns the list of Track Widths available to the board. +</p> +</li> +</ul></div> +<div class="listingblock"> +<div class="title">Board Inspection Example</div> +<div class="content"><!-- Generator: GNU source-highlight 3.1.7 +by Lorenzo Bettini +http://www.lorenzobettini.it +http://www.gnu.org/software/src-highlite --> +<pre><tt><span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900">#!/usr/bin/env python</span></span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> sys +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">from</span></span> pcbnew <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> <span style="color: #990000">*</span> + +filename<span style="color: #990000">=</span>sys<span style="color: #990000">.</span>argv<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #993399">1</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + +pcb <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">LoadBoard</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>filename<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + +ToUnits <span style="color: #990000">=</span> ToMM +FromUnits <span style="color: #990000">=</span> FromMM +<span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900">#ToUnits=ToMils</span></span> +<span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900">#FromUnits=FromMils</span></span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"LISTING VIAS:"</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">for</span></span> item <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">in</span></span> pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetTracks</span></span><span style="color: #990000">():</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">if</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">type</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>item<span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">is</span></span> VIA<span style="color: #990000">:</span> + + pos <span style="color: #990000">=</span> item<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetPosition</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + drill <span style="color: #990000">=</span> item<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetDrillValue</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + width <span style="color: #990000">=</span> item<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetWidth</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">" * Via: %s - %f/%f "</span><span style="color: #990000">%(</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToUnits</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pos<span style="color: #990000">),</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToUnits</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>drill<span style="color: #990000">),</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToUnits</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>width<span style="color: #990000">))</span> + + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">elif</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">type</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>item<span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">is</span></span> TRACK<span style="color: #990000">:</span> + + start <span style="color: #990000">=</span> item<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetStart</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + end <span style="color: #990000">=</span> item<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetEnd</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + width <span style="color: #990000">=</span> item<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetWidth</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">" * Track: %s to %s, width %f"</span> <span style="color: #990000">%</span> <span style="color: #990000">(</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToUnits</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>start<span style="color: #990000">),</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToUnits</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>end<span style="color: #990000">),</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToUnits</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>width<span style="color: #990000">))</span> + + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">else</span></span><span style="color: #990000">:</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Unknown type %s"</span> <span style="color: #990000">%</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">type</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>item<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">""</span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"LIST DRAWINGS:"</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">for</span></span> item <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">in</span></span> pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetDrawings</span></span><span style="color: #990000">():</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">if</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">type</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>item<span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">is</span></span> TEXTE_PCB<span style="color: #990000">:</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"* Text: '%s' at %s"</span><span style="color: #990000">%(</span>item<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetText</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(),</span> item<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetPosition</span></span><span style="color: #990000">())</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">elif</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">type</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>item<span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">is</span></span> DRAWSEGMENT<span style="color: #990000">:</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"* Drawing: %s"</span><span style="color: #990000">%</span>item<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetShapeStr</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># dir(item)</span></span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">else</span></span><span style="color: #990000">:</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">type</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>item<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">""</span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"LIST MODULES:"</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">for</span></span> module <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">in</span></span> pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetModules</span></span><span style="color: #990000">():</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"* Module: %s at %s"</span><span style="color: #990000">%(</span>module<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetReference</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(),</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToUnits</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>module<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetPosition</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()))</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">""</span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Ratsnest cnt:"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">len</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetFullRatsnest</span></span><span style="color: #990000">())</span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"track w cnt:"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">len</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetTrackWidthList</span></span><span style="color: #990000">())</span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"via s cnt:"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">len</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetViasDimensionsList</span></span><span style="color: #990000">())</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">""</span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"LIST ZONES:"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetAreaCount</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">for</span></span> idx <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">in</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">range</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span><span style="color: #993399">0</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetAreaCount</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()):</span> + zone<span style="color: #990000">=</span>pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetArea</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>idx<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"zone:"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> idx<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"priority:"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> zone<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetPriority</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(),</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"netname"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> zone<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetNetname</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">""</span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"NetClasses:"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetNetClasses</span></span><span style="color: #990000">().</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetCount</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(),</span></tt></pre></div></div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="_examples_2">15.6. Examples</h3> +<div class="sect3"> +<h4 id="_change_a_component_pin_8217_s_paste_mask_margin">15.6.1. Change a component pin’s paste mask margin</h4> +<div class="listingblock"> +<div class="title">We only want to change pins from 1 to 14, 15 is a thermal pad that must be kept as it is.</div> +<div class="content"><!-- Generator: GNU source-highlight 3.1.7 +by Lorenzo Bettini +http://www.lorenzobettini.it +http://www.gnu.org/software/src-highlite --> +<pre><tt><span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900">#!/usr/bin/env python2.7</span></span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> sys +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">from</span></span> pcbnew <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> <span style="color: #990000">*</span> + +filename<span style="color: #990000">=</span>sys<span style="color: #990000">.</span>argv<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #993399">1</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> +pcb <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">LoadBoard</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>filename<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + +<span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># Find module U304</span></span> +u304 <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">FindModuleByReference</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span><span style="color: #FF0000">'U304'</span><span style="color: #990000">)</span> +pads <span style="color: #990000">=</span> u304<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Pads</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + +<span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># Iterate over pads, printing solder paste margin</span></span> +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">for</span></span> p <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">in</span></span> pads<span style="color: #990000">:</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">print</span></span> p<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetPadName</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(),</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">ToMM</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>p<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetLocalSolderPasteMargin</span></span><span style="color: #990000">())</span> + id <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">int</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>p<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetPadName</span></span><span style="color: #990000">())</span> + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># Set margin to 0 for all but pad (pin) 15</span></span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">if</span></span> id<span style="color: #990000"><</span><span style="color: #993399">15</span><span style="color: #990000">:</span> p<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetLocalSolderPasteMargin</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span><span style="color: #993399">0</span><span style="color: #990000">)</span> + +pcb<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Save</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"mod_"</span><span style="color: #990000">+</span>filename<span style="color: #990000">)</span></tt></pre></div></div> +</div> +</div> +<div class="sect2"> +<h3 id="Footprint_Wizards">15.7. Footprint Wizards</h3> +<div class="paragraph"><p>The footprint wizards are a collection of python scripts that can be +accessed from the Footprint Editor. If you invoke the footprint dialog you +select a given wizard that allows you to see the footprint rendered, and you +have some parameters you can edit.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>If the plugins are not properly distributed to your system package, you can +find the latest versions in the KiCad source tree at +<a href="https://git.launchpad.net/kicad/tree/pcbnew/python/plugins">launchpad</a>.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>They should be located in for example <span class="monospaced">C:\Program +Files\KiCad\share\kicad\scripting\plugins</span>.</p></div> +<div class="paragraph"><p>On linux you can also keep your user plugins in <span class="monospaced">$HOME/.kicad_plugins</span>.</p></div> +<div class="listingblock"> +<div class="title">Build footprints easily filling in parameters.</div> +<div class="content"><!-- Generator: GNU source-highlight 3.1.7 +by Lorenzo Bettini +http://www.lorenzobettini.it +http://www.gnu.org/software/src-highlite --> +<pre><tt><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">from</span></span> __future__ <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> division +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> pcbnew + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000080">import</span></span> HelpfulFootprintWizardPlugin as HFPW + + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">class</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">FPC_FootprintWizard</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>HFPW<span style="color: #990000">.</span>HelpfulFootprintWizardPlugin<span style="color: #990000">):</span> + + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">def</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetName</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">):</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">return</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"FPC (SMT connector)"</span> + + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">def</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetDescription</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">):</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">return</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"FPC (SMT connector) Footprint Wizard"</span> + + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">def</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetValue</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">):</span> + pins <span style="color: #990000">=</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>parameters<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">][</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"*n"</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">return</span></span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"FPC_%d"</span> <span style="color: #990000">%</span> pins + + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">def</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GenerateParameterList</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">):</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">AddParam</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"n"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>uNatural<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #993399">40</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">AddParam</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"pitch"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>uMM<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #993399">0.5</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">AddParam</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"width"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>uMM<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #993399">0.25</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">AddParam</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"height"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>uMM<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #993399">1.6</span><span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">AddParam</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Shield"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"shield_to_pad"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>uMM<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #993399">1.6</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">AddParam</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Shield"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"from_top"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>uMM<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #993399">1.3</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">AddParam</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Shield"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"width"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>uMM<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #993399">1.5</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">AddParam</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Shield"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"height"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>uMM<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># build a rectangular pad</span></span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">def</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">smdRectPad</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">,</span>module<span style="color: #990000">,</span>size<span style="color: #990000">,</span>pos<span style="color: #990000">,</span>name<span style="color: #990000">):</span> + pad <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pcbnew<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">D_PAD</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>module<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetSize</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>size<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetShape</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pcbnew<span style="color: #990000">.</span>PAD_SHAPE_RECT<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetAttribute</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pcbnew<span style="color: #990000">.</span>PAD_ATTRIB_SMD<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetLayerSet</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SMDMask</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetPos0</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pos<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetPosition</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pos<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + pad<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">SetPadName</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>name<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">return</span></span> pad + + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">def</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">CheckParameters</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">):</span> + p <span style="color: #990000">=</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>parameters + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">CheckParamInt</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"*n"</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># not internal units preceded by "*"</span></span> + + + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">def</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">BuildThisFootprint</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">):</span> + p <span style="color: #990000">=</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>parameters + pad_count <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">int</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>p<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">][</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"*n"</span><span style="color: #990000">])</span> + pad_width <span style="color: #990000">=</span> p<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">][</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"width"</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + pad_height <span style="color: #990000">=</span> p<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">][</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"height"</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + pad_pitch <span style="color: #990000">=</span> p<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"Pads"</span><span style="color: #990000">][</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"pitch"</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + shl_width <span style="color: #990000">=</span> p<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"Shield"</span><span style="color: #990000">][</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"width"</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + shl_height <span style="color: #990000">=</span> p<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"Shield"</span><span style="color: #990000">][</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"height"</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + shl_to_pad <span style="color: #990000">=</span> p<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"Shield"</span><span style="color: #990000">][</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"shield_to_pad"</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + shl_from_top <span style="color: #990000">=</span> p<span style="color: #990000">[</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"Shield"</span><span style="color: #990000">][</span><span style="color: #FF0000">"from_top"</span><span style="color: #990000">]</span> + + offsetX <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pad_pitch <span style="color: #990000">*</span> <span style="color: #990000">(</span> pad_count<span style="color: #990000">-</span><span style="color: #993399">1</span> <span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="color: #990000">/</span> <span style="color: #993399">2</span> + size_pad <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pcbnew<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">wxSize</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> pad_width<span style="color: #990000">,</span> pad_height <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + size_shld <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pcbnew<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">wxSize</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>shl_width<span style="color: #990000">,</span> shl_height<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + size_text <span style="color: #990000">=</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetTextSize</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># IPC nominal</span></span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># Gives a position and size to ref and value texts:</span></span> + textposy <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pad_height<span style="color: #990000">/</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">+</span> pcbnew<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">FromMM</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span><span style="color: #993399">1</span><span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="color: #990000">+</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetTextThickness</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Reference</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #993399">0</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> textposy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> size_text <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + textposy <span style="color: #990000">=</span> textposy <span style="color: #990000">+</span> size_text <span style="color: #990000">+</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetTextThickness</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Value</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #993399">0</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> textposy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> size_text <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># create a pad array and add it to the module</span></span> + <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">for</span></span> n <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #0000FF">in</span></span> <span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">range</span></span> <span style="color: #990000">(</span> <span style="color: #993399">0</span><span style="color: #990000">,</span> pad_count <span style="color: #990000">):</span> + xpos <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pad_pitch<span style="color: #990000">*</span>n <span style="color: #990000">-</span> offsetX + pad <span style="color: #990000">=</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">smdRectPad</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>module<span style="color: #990000">,</span>size_pad<span style="color: #990000">,</span> pcbnew<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">wxPoint</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>xpos<span style="color: #990000">,</span><span style="color: #993399">0</span><span style="color: #990000">),</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">str</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>n<span style="color: #990000">+</span><span style="color: #993399">1</span><span style="color: #990000">))</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>module<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Add</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pad<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># Mechanical shield pads: left pad and right pad</span></span> + xpos <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span>shl_to_pad<span style="color: #990000">-</span>offsetX + pad_s0_pos <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pcbnew<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">wxPoint</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>xpos<span style="color: #990000">,</span>shl_from_top<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + pad_s0 <span style="color: #990000">=</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">smdRectPad</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>module<span style="color: #990000">,</span> size_shld<span style="color: #990000">,</span> pad_s0_pos<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"0"</span><span style="color: #990000">)</span> + xpos <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="color: #990000">(</span>pad_count<span style="color: #990000">-</span><span style="color: #993399">1</span><span style="color: #990000">)</span> <span style="color: #990000">*</span> pad_pitch<span style="color: #990000">+</span>shl_to_pad <span style="color: #990000">-</span> offsetX + pad_s1_pos <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pcbnew<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">wxPoint</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>xpos<span style="color: #990000">,</span>shl_from_top<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + pad_s1 <span style="color: #990000">=</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">smdRectPad</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>module<span style="color: #990000">,</span> size_shld<span style="color: #990000">,</span> pad_s1_pos<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #FF0000">"0"</span><span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>module<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Add</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pad_s0<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>module<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Add</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>pad_s1<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># add footprint outline</span></span> + linewidth <span style="color: #990000">=</span> self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">GetLineTickness</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span> + margin <span style="color: #990000">=</span> linewidth + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># upper line</span></span> + posy <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span>pad_height<span style="color: #990000">/</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span> linewidth<span style="color: #990000">/</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span> margin + xstart <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span> pad_pitch<span style="color: #990000">*</span><span style="color: #993399">0.5</span><span style="color: #990000">-</span>offsetX + xend <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pad_pitch <span style="color: #990000">*</span> pad_count <span style="color: #990000">+</span> xstart<span style="color: #990000">;</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span> xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy <span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># lower line</span></span> + posy <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pad_height<span style="color: #990000">/</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">+</span> linewidth<span style="color: #990000">/</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">+</span> margin + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># around left mechanical pad (the outline around right pad is mirrored/y axix)</span></span> + yend <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pad_s0_pos<span style="color: #990000">.</span>y <span style="color: #990000">+</span> shl_height<span style="color: #990000">/</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">+</span> margin + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> yend<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(-</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> yend<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + posy <span style="color: #990000">=</span> yend + xend <span style="color: #990000">=</span> pad_s0_pos<span style="color: #990000">.</span>x <span style="color: #990000">-</span> <span style="color: #990000">(</span>shl_width<span style="color: #990000">/</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">+</span> linewidth <span style="color: #990000">+</span> margin<span style="color: #990000">*</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span><span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># right pad side</span></span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(-</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span>xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> yend<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># vertical segment at left of the pad</span></span> + xstart <span style="color: #990000">=</span> xend + yend <span style="color: #990000">=</span> posy <span style="color: #990000">-</span> <span style="color: #990000">(</span>shl_height <span style="color: #990000">+</span> linewidth <span style="color: #990000">+</span> margin<span style="color: #990000">*</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span><span style="color: #990000">)</span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> yend<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># right pad side</span></span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(-</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span>xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> yend<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># horizontal segment above the pad</span></span> + xstart <span style="color: #990000">=</span> xend + xend <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span> pad_pitch<span style="color: #990000">*</span><span style="color: #993399">0.5</span><span style="color: #990000">-</span>offsetX + posy <span style="color: #990000">=</span> yend + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> yend<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># right pad side</span></span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(-</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,-</span>xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> yend<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># vertical segment above the pad</span></span> + xstart <span style="color: #990000">=</span> xend + yend <span style="color: #990000">=</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span>pad_height<span style="color: #990000">/</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span> linewidth<span style="color: #990000">/</span><span style="color: #993399">2</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span> margin + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> yend<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + <span style="font-style: italic"><span style="color: #9A1900"># right pad side</span></span> + self<span style="color: #990000">.</span>draw<span style="color: #990000">.</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">Line</span></span><span style="color: #990000">(-</span>xstart<span style="color: #990000">,</span> posy<span style="color: #990000">,</span> <span style="color: #990000">-</span>xend<span style="color: #990000">,</span> yend<span style="color: #990000">)</span> + + +<span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">FPC_FootprintWizard</span></span><span style="color: #990000">().</span><span style="font-weight: bold"><span style="color: #000000">register</span></span><span style="color: #990000">()</span></tt></pre></div></div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +</div> +<div id="footnotes"><hr></div> +<div id="footer"> +<div id="footer-text"> +Last updated 2017-08-24 22:19:25 BST +</div> +</div> +</body> +</html> |